Meeting Transcripts
  • City of Charlottesville
  • City Council Retreat 1/26/2022
  • Auto-scroll

City Council Retreat   1/26/2022

Attachments
  • AGENDA_20220126Jan26-Retreat_
  • PACKET_20220126Jan26-Retreat_
  • MINS_20220126Jan26Retreat-APPROVED
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:04:54
      Hi, Lachine, if you're there, would you mind being off mute and making some noise so I make sure my computer's listening?
    • SPEAKER_01
    • 00:05:01
      Hey, Sena, can you hear me?
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:05:04
      Yes, I can.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 00:05:05
      Thank you so much.
    • 00:05:06
      No problem.
    • 00:05:19
      Alice Sheen, this is Chrissy.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:05:20
      I just want to verify that I'm going to be handling the PowerPoint sharing my screen.
    • 00:05:26
      Is that correct?
    • SPEAKER_00
    • 00:05:27
      Yes, it is.
    • 00:05:28
      I'm in two meetings right now, so I'm also in retirement.
    • 00:05:31
      No problem.
    • 00:05:32
      You should have the share screen ability at the bottom of your screen.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:05:37
      I do.
    • 00:05:37
      It's green, so I assume that means it's active.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 00:05:40
      Yep, you're good.
    • 00:05:41
      Thank you.
    • 00:05:42
      No problem.
    • 00:06:30
      Good morning.
    • 00:06:31
      Morning.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:06:39
      Good morning, sorry.
    • 00:06:40
      Breakfast.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 00:06:41
      Figured nobody wanted to watch me eat.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 00:07:19
      Brian just said he'll just be about five minutes.
    • 00:07:26
      He's in a retirement commission meeting dedicated.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:07:33
      With Lachine who is bouncing too.
    • SPEAKER_07
    • 00:07:35
      That's right.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 00:07:54
      If you want to get started, I can just mark him present once he does arrive.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:07:59
      I'm looking at the agenda and it says welcome at nine o'clock and call the order at 915.
    • 00:08:10
      Was there some thought of something in particular we would be doing in the interim?
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 00:08:16
      I did not notice that.
    • 00:08:18
      I don't see Ms.
    • 00:08:19
      Marshall on here, so I don't know if she had other thoughts about that.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 00:08:34
      That if you finish up the budget discussion early, we can accommodate, we can either begin your discussion of your meeting rules and procedures or you can take a lengthy break.
    • 00:08:51
      We
    • 00:08:54
      have invited Robert Bob to participate in the session that is supposed to start at 1230 and he's not available before 1230.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:09:03
      Well, we've got all counselors.
    • 00:09:09
      We've got Sam on.
    • 00:09:11
      We've got Ashley on.
    • 00:09:13
      I guess we're ready to go.
    • 00:09:14
      Yep.
    • 00:09:16
      All right.
    • 00:09:17
      Well, even though it says 915, call the order.
    • 00:09:20
      At 903, I will call us to order.
    • 00:09:24
      For a work session, Ms.
    • 00:09:25
      Thomas, do we officially take a roll or do we just acknowledge, hey, we're all here?
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 00:09:30
      I'll go ahead and do it just because we're here.
    • 00:09:35
      Let's see, Councilor McGill?
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:09:37
      I am here.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 00:09:38
      Councilor Payne?
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 00:09:41
      Here.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 00:09:42
      Councilor Pinkston?
    • 00:09:44
      Here.
    • 00:09:45
      Mayor Snook?
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 00:09:46
      Here.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 00:09:46
      Vice Mayor Wade?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:09:48
      Here.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 00:09:50
      Thank you.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:09:51
      So we are now called to order.
    • 00:09:54
      We have a proposed agenda, which I hope everybody got, that chose us talking about money in the morning and work items in the afternoon.
    • 00:10:06
      Any other changes, any changes proposed to the agenda, or should we approve this one as is?
    • 00:10:14
      hearing no interest in changes.
    • 00:10:17
      Can I have a motion to approve the agenda?
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 00:10:19
      I move to approve.
    • 00:10:24
      Second.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:10:28
      Do we need a roll call on this one?
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 00:10:32
      Not really.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:10:33
      All in favor, raise your hand or say aye or something.
    • SPEAKER_07
    • 00:10:37
      Aye.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:10:38
      Okay.
    • 00:10:38
      We have an agenda.
    • 00:10:39
      All right.
    • 00:10:40
      So the next item is money, money, money.
    • 00:10:43
      and Chrissy and Kevin Roddy are to be leading us off.
    • 00:10:48
      Fire away.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:10:51
      Good morning, Council.
    • 00:10:52
      Chrissy Hamill with the Budget Office.
    • 00:10:54
      Kevin Roddy is here with me today.
    • 00:10:56
      For those of you that don't know, Kevin works for PFM and is the city's financial advisor.
    • 00:11:02
      So we have a PowerPoint we're going to present to you this morning, and this will be a new technology feat for me.
    • 00:11:10
      So I'm going to share my screen and keep my fingers crossed that everything works.
    • 00:11:16
      So here we go.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:11:17
      We have great faith, Chrissy.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 00:11:20
      Thank you.
    • 00:11:25
      Hey, can everybody see that?
    • 00:11:28
      Yes, ma'am.
    • 00:11:29
      Great.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:11:30
      Off to a good start.
    • 00:11:34
      So as part of our presentation this morning, we're going to talk to you about a couple things.
    • 00:11:39
      We're going to talk about just a general overview of the budget process itself, talk with council through some budget guidelines.
    • 00:11:47
      This is something that we tee up with each budget cycle, have you weigh in on those and make sure that we're headed in the right direction as we develop the 23 budget.
    • 00:11:58
      We're going to talk to you about long-term financial policies and an overview of our debt.
    • 00:12:03
      We'll talk about the council's operating budget.
    • 00:12:07
      And then we'll talk briefly about some expenditure drivers for the 23 budget that are influencing the development of that budget.
    • 00:12:18
      and at any time this is very low key so please feel free to interrupt with questions at any point and we'll be happy to address those as we go.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:12:29
      I should note that about 20 minutes ago you sent us a copy of all of this through our email so if any of you have not checked your email in the last 20 minutes you can find that and pull it up.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:12:42
      Yep, and I also posted this on the budget website under the work sessions tab.
    • 00:12:51
      If it's not there yet, once it's approved, it should pop up very shortly for anybody in the public that wants to view this as well.
    • 00:12:58
      Okay, so we'll talk about the budget process.
    • 00:13:06
      The budget process is basically an ever never ending cycle.
    • 00:13:13
      We work on this all year long, sometimes more than others.
    • 00:13:18
      And so right now we're sort of in the throes of that.
    • 00:13:21
      But this slide here is intended to sort of give you an overview of what the process looks like.
    • 00:13:28
      So it begins with staff.
    • 00:13:31
      Planning, Forecasts, Submissions, Strategic Planning.
    • 00:13:36
      All of those pieces are working throughout the year and help inform us as we work towards developing a budget.
    • 00:13:46
      We've talked to you before about several teams of staff that work together all during the year.
    • 00:13:51
      We have a revenue team, which
    • 00:13:55
      I would stand up to any.
    • 00:13:57
      It includes our finance director, our treasurer, our commissioner of revenue, our director of economic development.
    • 00:14:04
      We work on those projections all year long.
    • 00:14:08
      And I think, you know, those were one of the strengths that helped us through COVID.
    • 00:14:13
      That was a daily sometimes changing target.
    • 00:14:16
      But, you know, we were able to stay on top of that and address that.
    • 00:14:20
      And so those are all very important pieces that help us form a budget each year.
    • 00:14:26
      We take that information, staff and the city manager, departments submit their budgets as a proposal.
    • 00:14:36
      We spend time meeting with department heads and departments so they can review those budgets with the city manager.
    • 00:14:42
      That becomes the basis for our review and development of the budget each year.
    • 00:14:48
      We take all that information and that becomes part of what the city manager's proposed budget that is presented to council.
    • 00:14:59
      All of those factors sort of feed in to a proposed budget that is delivered to council in early March.
    • 00:15:06
      During that time, council then takes that budget.
    • 00:15:10
      You will review, you will amend, we'll have work sessions, the public will have input.
    • 00:15:16
      and then we'll take that information and council will formally adopt an operating budget for the year.
    • 00:15:22
      And as soon as that's done, we have a few short weeks of rest and then we start all over again.
    • 00:15:30
      So to kind of put a timeline to that process, August and September is really when we sort of kick off the CIP and we kick off the development process for the budget.
    • 00:15:45
      October, November.
    • 00:15:46
      That's when departments are creating their submissions.
    • 00:15:51
      And then in November and December, we are reviewing those submissions.
    • 00:15:56
      Departments are meeting with the city manager and the budget team to review those submissions.
    • 00:16:02
      We are formulating projections at that time.
    • 00:16:05
      In November, December timeframe, we're also preparing a CIP budget
    • 00:16:10
      which we go to the Planning Commission with and you all have a joint meeting to discuss the proposed CIP.
    • 00:16:16
      January and February, we're continuing to work on developing the budget, balancing, figuring out what our revenue forecast will look like.
    • 00:16:26
      And then in February, we have to advertise our tax rates.
    • 00:16:31
      So at this point, we're bumping up to this time schedule in terms of when we need to make decisions if there's an appetite to increase any taxes.
    • 00:16:43
      In March, the city manager will present its proposed budget to council, and then throughout the month of March, council will meet with the public, review the proposed budget, make its own suggestions, add its own touch to the budget, and then in April, you will formally make it your own budget by adopting it, and that will become the budget for the following year.
    • 00:17:10
      So a couple of things, our city code actually dictates a few things about the budget process.
    • 00:17:18
      So, you know, it defines the role of the city manager, which it basically says that the city manager is responsible for delivering and advising you of the budget and the financial situation on or before March 15th of each year.
    • 00:17:36
      and that this budget will contain estimates of our needs and resources and present to you a budget that is basically what the city manager views in his or her best judgment as the best path forward in terms of spending money for the next year.
    • 00:17:56
      So just sort of a graphic here, again, to reiterate the process, we take the departmental submissions, the budget guidelines that we'll talk about, council priorities that have been set forth, we use projections and forecasts, all of that goes into the creation of the proposed document.
    • 00:18:15
      And that's all done between city manager and staff, and then is presented to council.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 00:18:23
      And again, our city code... Excuse me, Chrissy, quick question.
    • 00:18:28
      Sure.
    • 00:18:29
      And you may get to this later.
    • 00:18:30
      I haven't seen the whole slide that you sent.
    • 00:18:33
      Can you just spend a few minutes to talk about what those departmental submissions look like?
    • 00:18:38
      I mean, does the city manager kind of, you know, say, you know, pie in the sky, what would you like?
    • 00:18:45
      Or, you know, is it a little bit more like, you know, this year is going to be a tough year.
    • 00:18:48
      So, you know, what does that look like?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:18:52
      Yeah, thanks.
    • 00:18:53
      Great question.
    • 00:18:53
      So it's a little bit of all of that.
    • 00:18:56
      We have an online system that we use internally for our budget submission process.
    • 00:19:02
      It's called OpenGov.
    • 00:19:04
      Departments go in, they have several years of actuals.
    • 00:19:09
      They have a listing of their last year's budget, which we term as sort of the base budget.
    • 00:19:16
      I'm sorry, what did you call the BASE?
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 00:19:18
      BASE, B-A-S-E, I'm sorry.
    • 00:19:19
      And they go through and review all of those.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:19:31
      those budgets and determine if there are, you know, minor things like contractual increases or things like that that are in their normal operating budget that are just normal contractual increases or things that have already happened in the prior year.
    • 00:19:49
      They make adjustments for that.
    • 00:19:51
      Anything new
    • 00:19:53
      that is on top of what's already sort of in their base budget, they submit as a new request.
    • 00:20:00
      And that all sort of gets compiled.
    • 00:20:05
      And once they submit that, then they meet with the city manager budget team
    • 00:20:11
      to discuss those issues, any increases, any new requests, all of that gets discussed.
    • 00:20:17
      And then through the process of balancing the budget, the city manager and the budget team will make a recommendation for what gets included and what does not.
    • 00:20:34
      So once the proposed budget is delivered to the city council, you, as again, I mentioned that in February, we need to decide on if there's any proposed tax changes.
    • 00:20:48
      We're required to advertise that roughly 30 days, or not roughly, we are required to advertise that at least 30 days prior to any public hearing, and that public hearing will happen in March.
    • 00:21:03
      and then you are required to adopt a budget prior to April 15th of each year.
    • 00:21:10
      So all of these considerations in the city code sort of drive our budget schedule, if you will.
    • 00:21:17
      And again, as the graphic here shows, you'll be delivered with a proposed budget.
    • 00:21:23
      You'll take the details of that, public input, your own touch, and you'll make recommendations for amendments that will ultimately result in an adopted budget.
    • 00:21:41
      So to talk about some important dates, if we back up from that 30 day requirement on the tax rate, February 14 is essentially the magic date by which we will have the budget balanced.
    • 00:21:56
      And what I mean by that is that we will know the maximum amount that we are willing to increase our budget.
    • 00:22:06
      and we have to put an ad in the paper.
    • 00:22:08
      So that's the date we're working for.
    • 00:22:12
      March 7th is when you'll actually be delivered the proposed budget.
    • 00:22:18
      March 21st is the first public hearing on any tax rates.
    • 00:22:23
      So this is the benchmark for the 30-day window.
    • 00:22:27
      And I've backed that up just a little bit to give us some extra time in case there are errors or printing problems when we post that ad.
    • 00:22:35
      So that's how we got to February 14th.
    • 00:22:39
      and then March 4th will be the second public hearing and then finally on, I'm sorry, April 4th and then finally on April 12th we will formally adopt the budget.
    • 00:22:54
      We, as I mentioned, we'll spend much of the month of March in work sessions.
    • 00:23:01
      So here are some important dates.
    • 00:23:02
      And again, this calendar is also on the budget web page.
    • 00:23:07
      February 2, you'll have a joint meeting with the school board.
    • 00:23:11
      This will be when they will present their budget or their budget proposal to the city council.
    • 00:23:19
      On February 3rd, we'll have sort of a kick the sort of official kickoff of the budget work session.
    • 00:23:25
      That's when we'll talk a little bit more nitty gritty about where we are with the budget at that point.
    • 00:23:33
      March 10th will be the first budget in the series of four budget work sessions and we'll also have a community budget forum.
    • 00:23:43
      Typically, each work session is a different topic.
    • 00:23:47
      There's one on the CIP.
    • 00:23:49
      There'll be one on the vibrant community funds and outside agency funding.
    • 00:23:55
      The one on April 7th is typically we mark that as tentative.
    • 00:23:59
      Sometimes we need it.
    • 00:24:00
      Sometimes we don't.
    • 00:24:01
      Just depends on how far along we are by the time we get there.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 00:24:11
      So any questions on the process, dates, any of that?
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:24:15
      I just want to clarify one thing, Chrissy.
    • 00:24:21
      So we're going to have to figure out if we're raising real estate taxes before we'll know if we get the sales tax.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:24:30
      If you have any intent of including it in the 23 budget, that would be correct.
    • 00:24:37
      One thing I would just remind you based on the conversations that we've talked about related to any real estate tax increase, all of the additional costs and that was specifically has been talked about in relation to the school reconfiguration project.
    • 00:24:55
      All of the dates that relate to that don't really hit the budget until the 24 budget process.
    • 00:25:03
      So that would not, there's not necessarily a need to increase the tax rate for 23 if you're increasing it for the school reconfiguration project.
    • 00:25:17
      So therefore you would have time to wait until you find out about the sales tax.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:25:22
      Okay.
    • 00:25:23
      But we've also been talking about needing to increase the tax rate for other reasons as well, correct?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:25:30
      That would be a discussion for council, yes.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:25:33
      Okay, I just wanted to clarify a few of those as far as like where they fit into timelines.
    • 00:25:38
      Yep.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:25:40
      Chrissy, my question deals with the Vibrant Community Fund.
    • 00:25:46
      We've got a work session set for March 17th that would be directed towards the Vibrant Community Fund.
    • 00:25:54
      In years past, we have had more than just, you know, an hour, hour and a half, two hours to talk about the VCF procedures and allocations and everything else.
    • 00:26:08
      And often, if I'm remembering correctly,
    • 00:26:11
      We would have the Vibrant Community Fund presentation at one point, we would get a typically about 100 page document that we need to have mastered by about three days later with all kinds of community input into that process before we ever see it.
    • 00:26:33
      I've always been a little bit frustrated at the
    • 00:26:38
      the way that we handle the Vibrant Community Fund in how we get to a decision on this.
    • 00:26:45
      And I think most counselors have been dissatisfied with the process, in some cases for different reasons.
    • 00:26:54
      I may be dissatisfied for a different reason than either Counselor McGill or Counselor Payne expressed last year, but I think they weren't terribly happy with it in all respects either, if I'm remembering correctly.
    • 00:27:05
      I'm just wondering whether any thought has been given to what that Vibrant Community Fund process will look like and how we will get enough information to be able to do something other than either rubber stamp or just kind of say, well, okay, here's one issue, let's fuss about and scoot it along.
    • 00:27:31
      Any discussions on changing that process at all?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:27:34
      So I will defer a little bit to Ms.
    • 00:27:38
      Marshall.
    • 00:27:38
      What I do know is that that group has assembled sort of and begun their scoring process, their review and scoring process.
    • 00:27:50
      They are well on their way to recommendations.
    • 00:27:55
      I'm not aware, but that doesn't mean that there isn't something happening.
    • 00:28:00
      Ms.
    • 00:28:00
      Marshall, do you have any further information on that?
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 00:28:04
      Yes, ma'am.
    • 00:28:04
      To my understanding, there is no change to the actual procedure.
    • 00:28:09
      Again, with vibrant communities, just for the sake of anyone who happens to be on the call, a group of community and staff members review the applications and provide ratings.
    • 00:28:22
      Those ratings help the human services team to provide a suggested dollar amount of investment for that particular nonprofit and or particular program.
    • 00:28:33
      and then they are presented to council as one big document.
    • 00:28:39
      To my understanding, and while we're here, I will reach out to Mr. Hunter Smith to make sure that I am not misspeaking, Mayor.
    • 00:28:47
      I do not believe there are any changes for this fiscal year in how the presentation is made.
    • 00:28:52
      I can tell you that that team currently being led wonderfully by Misty Graves as an interim
    • 00:28:58
      does see that there's always room for improvement in that process.
    • 00:29:01
      So they would be more than delighted to hear any thoughts or processes that council may have on conundrums within the process that they can sort of move into making proper corrections of.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:29:16
      One of the issues in particular was whether groups such as the drug court or the therapeutic community or the therapeutic docket, whether those kinds of programs even ought to be a part of the vibrant community fund process or whether we ought to simply say those are contractual matters.
    • 00:29:39
      We're not going to stiff them because we're part of that contract already.
    • 00:29:46
      Is that still going to be part of the VCF process?
    • 00:29:49
      If it is, I mean, I thought we had a majority sentiment last year to take it out of the VCF process, but we didn't have a formal vote on it.
    • 00:29:58
      So I didn't know how that's proceeding.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 00:30:02
      And that is something I'm actually, if you see me looking a little to the side, I'm actually trying to log into my applications.
    • 00:30:09
      I helped and provided assistance so I could learn more about the process this year, but I focused in on housing and health work.
    • 00:30:17
      So I did not, if there is a drug court one, I did not rate it.
    • 00:30:22
      So that's why at this point, I can't tell you if it's still in there.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:30:25
      I can address those two specifically.
    • 00:30:27
      They did submit as part of the process, but those two programs in particular were reviewed as contractual.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:30:38
      Okay.
    • 00:30:40
      That's the only real issue that I can think of, the procedural issue that we were really talking about that I wanted to make sure was going to get reflected.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:30:50
      Yeah, I think those are covered.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:30:52
      Thank you.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:30:53
      I think one of the other procedural issues that we were having issues with was just trying to understand the rating system because what we see is the end result and then we get a lot of pushback as to, well, why didn't this program get fully funded?
    • 00:31:12
      And we don't understand what is being rated because we never see the whole application or anything.
    • 00:31:19
      We just see the recommendation.
    • 00:31:23
      and we don't see the reasons why it was recommended one way or another.
    • 00:31:29
      And that gets very, it's hard as a leader to say, well, I'm accepting this because I'm told to.
    • 00:31:39
      I mean, it's important for us to understand the why under it so that we can express to people why something rated as rated.
    • 00:31:52
      and how they can potentially change it down the road.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 00:31:56
      That makes absolute sense.
    • 00:31:58
      Again, I will touch base with both Hunter and Ms.
    • 00:32:02
      Graves to make sure that I convey that.
    • 00:32:07
      In my opinion, I see that as simply providing you all with the scoring rubric as well as an explanation.
    • 00:32:13
      I don't see that being terribly complicated or controversial.
    • 00:32:19
      I can tell you it's a Likert scale and it asks you questions.
    • 00:32:23
      So for example, there's one of, did the program effectively engage needy and underserved populations?
    • 00:32:29
      there's a particular Likert scale for that.
    • 00:32:31
      So I don't see a problem with us being able to provide that data to you all and also give maybe an additional briefing and being willing to take feedback.
    • 00:32:42
      That is the one thing I will tell you that Ms.
    • 00:32:43
      Graves and her team is more than happy to do is to take feedback and they're continuously refining the process.
    • 00:32:49
      So for example, this is the first year where there has actually been a diversity, equity, inclusion, and justice question
    • 00:32:55
      that individual applicants had to answer because we know that's an important criteria for council, but we never asked it before.
    • 00:33:04
      So again, just to show that's a change that got made this year to make sure that we're hitting all the notes that council wants to make sure we are investing in organizations who have the following attributes and are doing great things for our community.
    • 00:33:16
      So I don't foresee that being an issue, Councillor McGill.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:33:20
      Excellent, yeah, because I never wanted it to come across that we're not trusting staff's opinion or the people or the community members who are part of the ratings groups.
    • 00:33:30
      But when you're only looking at that end results and you're trying to answer questions from the community as to, well, why didn't this group get it?
    • 00:33:39
      It's very difficult if you don't know the underlying why.
    • 00:33:43
      So thank you so much.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 00:33:45
      Yeah, and I just want to tag in, gosh, probably for 15, 20 years,
    • 00:33:49
      I was one of the citizens when we were the city, the county United Way was doing all this together and we would meet, I don't know, maybe a dozen or so times, three or four hours each time and would, you know, make those recommendations to the board of supervisors and city council and so we knew that there would be a certain amount of
    • 00:34:11
      Scrutiny or information, but not get into the details that we did, you know, conducting interviews, site visits and things like that.
    • 00:34:20
      Of course, I assume we can do that, but, you know, with everything going on, we probably can't get into the level of, you know, work that the committee did.
    • 00:34:29
      But I say that to say that I think that we can and should ask questions and ask for a lot more information.
    • 00:34:37
      But the work that these different committees do, man, they really get into the nuts and bolts of it.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:34:44
      And just looking at the VCF thing again, and it's my last thought on this, the budget work session for the VCF proposals is Thursday, March 17th.
    • 00:34:56
      We have a budget work session on March 10th, which is related to revenues and expenses.
    • 00:35:02
      Would it be unfair to ask
    • 00:35:05
      that we have the 100 pages or so or whatever we would get on the VCF process.
    • 00:35:12
      It would be unfair to ask that we receive that by Friday, March 11th so that we could have the weekend to review it, to come and to offer comments or questions, say by the following Monday or Tuesday so that when we have the budget work session on the 17th,
    • 00:35:31
      the staff who need to be able to answer our questions at least have those questions teed up for them.
    • 00:35:37
      Does that sound reasonable?
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 00:35:41
      Yes, sir.
    • 00:35:42
      I believe that that's reasonable.
    • 00:35:43
      And I will, I'm actually pinning an email to our team right now.
    • 00:35:46
      And I will add that into the email to make sure that they're aware of your desire to have the document so that you all can message questions.
    • 00:35:56
      So that again, those team members are prepared to respond to at least your preliminary questions.
    • 00:36:01
      Naturally, you may have more on a second read or once someone answers a question, but I do not see that as unreasonable.
    • 00:36:08
      Yeah.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:36:09
      How about other counselors?
    • 00:36:10
      Does that sound reasonable to you all?
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 00:36:14
      Yes.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:36:14
      Got a couple of thumbs ups?
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 00:36:16
      Yes.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:36:17
      Okay.
    • 00:36:19
      Let's plan on that.
    • 00:36:20
      Obviously circumstances might change, but if nothing else, if we get that schedule and Councillor McGill, it can go off to the National League of Cities meeting, having done her homework.
    • 00:36:33
      Thanks.
    • 00:36:35
      Ms.
    • 00:36:35
      Hamill, back to you.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:36:37
      Thank you.
    • 00:36:39
      So we want to move on and talk about the budget guidelines a little bit.
    • 00:36:43
      These are guidelines that we tee up every year.
    • 00:36:45
      They largely have not changed.
    • 00:36:50
      But we do sort of reach out to council at this point to make sure that we're headed in the right direction.
    • 00:36:57
      So with that, we'll just kind of dig in.
    • 00:37:00
      And again, please feel free to stop and let's discuss anyone along the way.
    • 00:37:06
      So first thing we do is annually we review all our major tax rates.
    • 00:37:11
      We do that in consideration of where we stand.
    • 00:37:15
      In terms of our peers, we largely look at our, you know, top five or six that's real estate, personal property, sales, meals and lodging.
    • 00:37:24
      Those are also the sort of hot topics that we continue to talk with you about during COVID.
    • 00:37:31
      especially meals lodging and sales tax were dramatically impacted by COVID.
    • 00:37:37
      I think you'll find with this budget that we are thankful that we're climbing back to pre-COVID levels on those and so we'll talk about that a little bit later.
    • 00:37:48
      Again as Councilor McGill brought up if you think that there are things that
    • 00:37:58
      in addition to the school reconfiguration project or other things if there's anyone who is now considering adjusting or raising any of those rates this would be a really good time to let us know that so that one we can meet the advertising deadline but also so that we can budget accordingly.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 00:38:22
      the second one is we we yes what would be the process to do that I mean you're not asking us specifically now but I guess the next council meeting or something mayor snook because this seems like a really big question that we need to sort of get a handle on and maybe this isn't the right time to talk about it but at some point in the near future we need to
    • 00:38:47
      Say, yeah, we do have these, I realize schools are, you've told us we've got another year basically on that, but there are other things that are more urgent, I guess, and so at some point we should take, I think, start the tax conversation sooner rather than later, given that we've got about three weeks.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:39:05
      And I, to follow up on that question, Ms.
    • 00:39:07
      Hamill, you had said, if I recall the sentence, something like, this would be the time
    • 00:39:13
      And I don't know whether you mean by today would be the time or whether a particular point in February, let's say, would be the time.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:39:23
      You know, I don't know that there's a time that's one better than another.
    • 00:39:27
      From my perspective, you know, where we sit in terms of the budget, if we have big ideas for raising taxes to do other things, we certainly would like, staff would certainly like as much time as possible to start working on that, to give you information.
    • 00:39:47
      And so, you know, I would say that if you have some ideas and considerations, we could use this time to at least tee that off.
    • 00:39:58
      And then to your point, we probably do need to either through a series of discussions or other meetings, start working on that right away.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:40:08
      Well, I'm aware of the fact that the assessor is going to be releasing assessment data, I think, tomorrow.
    • 00:40:16
      It would be premature for us today to start talking about the assumptions that are going to be built in as a result of that.
    • 00:40:25
      But I think that we probably ought to figure on a time fairly soon and maybe the time to talk about it would be the February 3rd work session.
    • 00:40:40
      Would that be an appropriate time to talk about?
    • 00:40:42
      You said budget development is what's listed as the topic.
    • 00:40:46
      Would that be a good time to talk about this?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:40:49
      Sure.
    • 00:40:49
      Yeah.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:40:51
      So why don't we figure that we'll have that substantive discussion during the February 3 work session.
    • 00:40:57
      Does that sound reasonable to other counselors?
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:41:00
      Yeah, because I kind of assumed that we were having to raise taxes this year.
    • 00:41:03
      So, um,
    • 00:41:05
      beyond school reconfiguration issues, just between the need to make up some grants that are ending, the need to look at collective bargaining and what that's gonna cost us, and anticipation of knowing that we have to also raise, we're struggling to get
    • 00:41:35
      you know, people to work for the rates that we are paying.
    • 00:41:39
      We know we have to up our pay scales in order to retain and get new employees, so.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:41:49
      So we have to have a decision made about what tax rate we want advertised by February 14th so it can be published on February 17th.
    • 00:42:01
      Is that right, Ms.
    • 00:42:01
      Amel?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:42:02
      That is correct.
    • 00:42:03
      And the idea with that ad is that we can always go down, we can't go up.
    • 00:42:11
      So it sets our max.
    • 00:42:13
      However, if we advertise a higher rate, we also have to propose a budget that includes a spend plan for that.
    • 00:42:24
      Okay.
    • 00:42:27
      It's not a matter of saying, oh, well, let's just advertise, you know, five cent increase.
    • 00:42:32
      We have to have a plan for how we intend to spend that.
    • 00:42:37
      So just an idea and balance the budget to that.
    • 00:42:40
      So just keep that in mind.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:42:43
      So if we did the budget work session February 3rd, if we had further things to be discussed, we would have a council meeting on February 7th.
    • 00:42:52
      where we could continue things and perhaps make a final decision on the 7th so that that would meet your February 14th deadline.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 00:43:02
      That would work.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:43:03
      All right.
    • 00:43:04
      Thank you.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 00:43:04
      Sure.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:43:06
      Anybody else have procedural questions about that?
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 00:43:08
      Yeah, just one thing, and this may be more tactical than procedural, but so you're going to get the tax.
    • 00:43:14
      We'll have the tax assessment data tomorrow.
    • 00:43:18
      It would be helpful to me if there were some, the term they used in the military, wargaming or scenarios or something, hypotheticals played out in terms of given the current tax assessments, if we raise rates by this many pennies, what this would look like in terms of revenue.
    • 00:43:40
      Now that we have some more specifics about what our actual tax assessments will be, it would be helpful to me to have some just basic kinds of this is what another penny or two would equal as soon as I could get thinking about it prior to the meeting on the third.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:44:01
      So you're stealing our thunder a little bit.
    • 00:44:03
      We're actually going to give you some of that today.
    • SPEAKER_00
    • 00:44:05
      All right.
    • 00:44:05
      Sorry.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:44:06
      No, no, no.
    • 00:44:07
      No worries.
    • 00:44:08
      Great question.
    • 00:44:12
      Okay, so got a plan for talking about the tax rates.
    • 00:44:16
      Secondly, you know, keep in mind, whatever we're going to develop operational budgets projected within our available revenues.
    • 00:44:25
      So that said, you know, as of right now, staff is under marching orders that we're balancing our budget to the current revenues we project with no tax increase.
    • 00:44:38
      That's sort of the assumption we're working under now.
    • 00:44:41
      So as we continue these conversations, we can figure that out as we go.
    • 00:44:46
      Thirdly, we're going to focus on Council's strategic plan goals.
    • 00:44:50
      Again, I know later you're going to be talking about this.
    • 00:44:53
      For now, we're extending the current strategic plan, and those five goals that are listed here is basically an inclusive community of self-sufficient residents.
    • 00:45:08
      a healthy and safe city a beautiful and sustainable natural and built environment a strong creative and diversified economy and a well-managed and responsive organization so as we prepare the budget you'll see throughout the budget document that will be presented to you we will be highlighting things throughout the budget that help meet these five goals
    • 00:45:35
      Fourth, sort of working in tandem with the goals, we will be incorporating performance measures that will help assist with decisions and to see how we're reaching those goals.
    • 00:45:50
      We also plan to continue the strong commitment to education by continuing the formula of funding 40% of any new real estate and property tax revenue to the schools.
    • 00:46:03
      We will continue to invest strategically in employees by providing adequate pay, benefits and training, technology resources, support and appreciation.
    • 00:46:15
      Annually, we review the living wage ordinance to ensure that that's where you think it needs to be.
    • 00:46:22
      We're currently at $15.
    • 00:46:25
      and we also decide that we fund no new programs or major expansion of existing programs without finding a way to fully offset that with either offsetting revenues or reductions in expenditures.
    • 00:46:44
      So that's the key for how we balance the budget.
    • 00:46:51
      Moving on, we work in the budget to balance reinvestment in the city's existing infrastructure and facilities.
    • 00:47:00
      We do that through dollars in the CIP and also throughout the general fund for general facilities repair initiatives.
    • 00:47:09
      We adhere to our policy of transferring at least 3% of general fund expenditures or 3% of the total general fund budget to the CIP.
    • 00:47:20
      That's the cash funded or PAYGO portion that we've talked about.
    • 00:47:25
      We budget a reserve for council strategic initiatives and I have a slide where we're going to talk about that a little bit later.
    • 00:47:32
      And then we also balance a fund balance target adjustment to help make sure that we maintain our 17% policy.
    • 00:47:45
      The policy is such that we have to maintain 17% of our budget.
    • 00:47:50
      So as our budget goes up each year, there's some portion of that that increases our 17% number gets higher and we want to just make sure that we preserve that.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:48:04
      17% is what now?
    • 00:48:05
      I'm not seeing it on the slide.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:48:08
      So we have a policy that we maintain a 17% fund balance rainy day fund.
    • 00:48:16
      It's often referred to in the general fund.
    • 00:48:18
      So it's 17% of the total general fund budget.
    • 00:48:22
      14% of that is what we call our
    • 00:48:27
      I'm sorry, 3% of that, 3% of the 17, we actually have designated as a downturn reserve fund and per our policy it has restrictions for which we can or cannot use that for and that it must be replenished.
    • 00:48:45
      Kevin will get into this a little bit in his presentation too.
    • 00:48:49
      That's sort of a key data point for rating agencies and it also helps determine our other policies that are related to our debt capacity and the policy we have with our 10% debt service policy and things of that nature.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:49:07
      So is that
    • 00:49:14
      The 17%, does that relate to any of the paragraphs on this slide?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:49:20
      No, it's really all in of itself, if you will.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:49:24
      I was looking at the slide and thinking, where does the 17% come in?
    • 00:49:27
      Okay.
    • 00:49:28
      Is it an additional item?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:49:30
      It is.
    • 00:49:31
      It is.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:49:32
      Okay.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 00:49:34
      I'm sorry, Chrissy.
    • 00:49:37
      Is 17% one of the major factors that allowed the city to have that AAA bond rating?
    • 00:49:43
      Is that
    • 00:49:44
      one of the primary things that they look at.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:49:48
      It is.
    • 00:49:48
      So a fund balance and Kevin jump in if I apologize for the rogue phone.
    • 00:49:54
      I thought I turned that off.
    • 00:49:57
      That is one of the factors that the rating agency reviews.
    • 00:50:02
      I'll remind you that several years ago, I'm going to miss the dates, but I want to say it was like 2012.
    • 00:50:10
      The city used to have an 8% fund balance policy.
    • 00:50:14
      and we've always had a strong fund balance policy, but 8% in relation to our peers is average and 17% is average.
    • 00:50:27
      In anticipation of knowing that we were going to be issuing more debt, we actually came back to council and said, hey, as a trade-off for issuing more debt, we'd like to go to the rating agencies and say that we are going to increase our fund balance policy.
    • 00:50:43
      and we did that and we raised it.
    • 00:50:49
      We had set aside in 2008 some bonds because of the economic downturn that we actually did not end up meeting and we reverted that to increase our fund balance to the current policy we have now.
    • 00:51:03
      So it is an important factor and Kevin I don't know if you have anything you want to add on that.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 00:51:07
      Yeah, just to clarify some of those numbers, the 8% was your maximum amount of debt service that you could issue.
    • 00:51:18
      So your fund balance, so there's two things that are working in combination, the maximum amount of debt you could issue and then your minimum amount of your fund balance.
    • 00:51:29
      And so your fund balance was 12%.
    • 00:51:32
      And we said, well, we see a lot of debt coming.
    • 00:51:38
      and so we raised the 8% to 10% in terms of your maximum death service and simultaneously we bumped up the amount of reserves that you would have in the bank from I believe 15% to 17% so a lot of numbers and in a couple slides
    • 00:52:01
      Vice Mayor Wade, I'll talk about the components of your rating, but certainly reserves, money in the bank is one of the strong.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:52:14
      The 17% rainy day fund, that's 17% of general fund expenditures for any particular fiscal year?
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 00:52:22
      Correct.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:52:22
      Okay, thanks.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 00:52:26
      Is there a
    • 00:52:29
      some sort of, I guess, historic reason for item 10 there, transferring at least 3%.
    • 00:52:33
      It would be awesome, I would think, if we could transfer 4% or 5%.
    • 00:52:38
      Is that over into the CIP?
    • 00:52:43
      Is that just a historic number, or is that based off comparison to other localities?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:52:52
      You're talking about the 3% transfer to the CIP?
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 00:52:55
      Yes, ma'am, item number 10.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:52:59
      Kevin, do you know if that's a standard for other localities?
    • 00:53:02
      I mean, I know that was a policy we set internally.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 00:53:05
      Yeah, no, I think you're exactly right.
    • 00:53:09
      You know, as we get into the CIP component of this, you know, the numbers are growing larger.
    • 00:53:15
      So the more that you can handle with your current budget, the better.
    • 00:53:21
      The numbers really vary across municipalities.
    • 00:53:25
      Some do more.
    • 00:53:27
      Some don't really even do any and that is what causes parts of the problem.
    • 00:53:34
      But yes, if you want to explore bumping that up a percent or two, I think that really helps over time.
    • SPEAKER_14
    • 00:53:46
      Thank you.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:53:48
      While we're on this slide, the Reserve for Council Strategic Initiatives
    • 00:53:54
      My recollection was that we've had a council strategic initiatives fund that was a couple of years ago, like a million dollars, and we've spent it down.
    • 00:54:05
      I'm not aware of us having put more money into it.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:54:08
      That's correct.
    • 00:54:09
      So we have done different things with this account over time.
    • 00:54:15
      There were years when we budgeted, you know, a couple hundred, I think at one point it was like $200,000 that was actually included in the budget.
    • 00:54:26
      We have added money in there using year-end surplus funds.
    • 00:54:31
      We've used it for a whole bunch of, or council has used it for, you know, a whole bunch of initiatives.
    • 00:54:38
      As of late, we have not added funds to that because whatever is not spent has carried over from year to year.
    • 00:54:47
      And we'll talk, I have a slide on this, but roughly right now there's about $176,000 of unallocated money in that account for council to use.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:54:57
      See, do we have any, this was actually, I was
    • 00:55:01
      Do you have any guidelines for the Council Strategic Initiatives Fund?
    • 00:55:06
      Guidelines, a written policy about how this is utilized?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:55:11
      I'll tell you what, let me just go ahead and flip to that since we're here.
    • 00:55:15
      and because I did add some language here.
    • 00:55:18
      So one of the important factors on this account is that it was intended to be for one-time funding.
    • 00:55:26
      It was intended to give council some flexibility so that as we balance the budget and as things happen during the year,
    • 00:55:38
      or new programs come along or initiatives or events that you want to fund.
    • 00:55:43
      It gives you an opportunity to be able to address some of that.
    • 00:55:49
      So one-time money, I would say is probably the most important piece of that.
    • 00:55:55
      But in terms of the rest, it's really a decision for council and it requires appropriation to be spent.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:56:03
      But do we have that actually written down as a policy that strategic investment, the strategic initiative fund can only be used for one-time funding?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:56:14
      I do not think there is a formal policy on that.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 00:56:16
      Okay.
    • 00:56:17
      That's something we need to work on then.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:56:19
      Last year, I asked some questions about this strategic investment fund and was told basically there is nothing written down about it, that it has occasionally been referred to as an equity fund.
    • 00:56:34
      That is something that council, when it was originally created, the idea was that it would be spent on equity initiatives, but that it was not a binding resolution or anything other than just sort of talk from the dais.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:56:50
      Yeah, so I think that's correct.
    • 00:56:52
      And I would also say that the equity piece sort of came in, I believe, right around the time of the Blue Ribbon Commission, and those kind of things.
    • 00:57:04
      And there were actually dollars that were designated and budgeted to the strategic investment account to be used for equity initiatives.
    • 00:57:14
      So over time, that's sort of gotten, you know, grayed.
    • 00:57:19
      But, and it has is often referred to as either strategic investment account, the equity account.
    • 00:57:27
      But it has, it is basically this one account that either through the budget, year end surpluses, or other sources, council has appropriated money here.
    • 00:57:39
      And then they have used those funds for
    • 00:57:42
      different sort of initiatives.
    • 00:57:45
      And, you know, I might say like some of this actually was not, it did not end up being one time.
    • 00:57:51
      I mean, we, you know, we've funded some startup things out of that.
    • 00:57:55
      So for example, the initial funding for Home to Hope came from this account.
    • 00:58:00
      The initial request for the food equity came from this account.
    • 00:58:05
      But then we've also funded, you
    • 00:58:11
      using these funds as well.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 00:58:14
      And is there any sort of recurring replenishment of them, of these funds, or that's done every budget year?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:58:22
      Um, you know, again, it's, um, in some years we have added money to this account as part of the budget process at the request of counsel or at the discretion of the city manager.
    • 00:58:34
      Um, and then as of late that it has not been part of the budget and the funds that were added were typically added with sort of year end surplus money.
    • SPEAKER_14
    • 00:58:48
      Thank you.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 00:58:49
      Mm hmm.
    • 00:58:53
      I'm going to scroll back up.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:58:59
      Any other of these budget guidelines that gives you heartache, things we need to talk about?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:59:04
      I'm not sure that I understand number 12, budget of fund balance target adjustment pool.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:59:15
      Sure.
    • 00:59:16
      So this is one of those things that's kind of clear as mud.
    • 00:59:19
      So I'm glad you asked.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 00:59:21
      Is that coming up in the next page or two?
    • 00:59:23
      Is that long term financial policies, which is the next page?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 00:59:28
      Not, not really.
    • 00:59:30
      So what this is, is, again, we talked to you about our 17% fund balance policy.
    • 00:59:38
      So the simple math there is, if our budget was $100,000, we are required to maintain a fund balance that's equal to 17% of the total budget.
    • 00:59:51
      So each year, you know, this year our budget might be $100,000, next year might be $110,000, and the next year might be $120,000.
    • 00:59:56
      So as your budget increases each year, the expected target increases.
    • 01:00:08
      to get to that 17% also increases in dollars.
    • 01:00:12
      The percent stays the same, but now it's a percent of a bigger number.
    • 01:00:16
      And so because we don't know what that 17, like as we're planning the 23 budget,
    • 01:00:24
      You know, we don't know what the 24 budget is going to be.
    • 01:00:27
      And we're still working on the 23.
    • 01:00:30
      And so this is a balance that is budgeted to help make sure that we are going to meet the 17% target.
    • 01:00:45
      So it's basically some planning to make sure that we're going to meet our target.
    • 01:00:51
      It gives us a little cushion, to be honest.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 01:00:54
      A rainy day fund for the rainy day fund?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:00:58
      In some respects, yes.
    • 01:01:01
      You know, especially this was important, like in 20 when, you know, COVID hit mid-year or towards the last quarter of the year and revenues did not materialize.
    • 01:01:16
      This gives us some fallback to make sure that we're meeting our policy.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 01:01:20
      So it's essentially sort of risk mitigation, a risk mitigation tactic you've got.
    • SPEAKER_07
    • 01:01:28
      Exactly.
    • 01:01:29
      Yes.
    • SPEAKER_01
    • 01:01:38
      Anything else on these?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 01:01:39
      Let's keep going.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:01:42
      Okay.
    • 01:01:46
      So we're going to move into our long term financial policies and
    • 01:01:55
      Here they are.
    • 01:01:56
      Basically, these are the policies that we'll often refer to as our policy.
    • 01:02:03
      These are kind of the benchmark of those.
    • 01:02:06
      So again, we talked about the 17%, which encompasses basically the first two bullets here.
    • 01:02:11
      We maintain a minimum general fund balance of at least 14%, and we maintain a minimum downturn reserve fund balance of no less than 3% of the general fund.
    • 01:02:23
      We maintain sufficient working capital in the utilities funds.
    • 01:02:27
      That is essentially about 60 days of working capital.
    • 01:02:31
      We stabilize all non-general funds by ensuring they have a positive fund balance.
    • 01:02:37
      We have a debt service policy in which as a percent of the general fund total expenditure budget, our policy is that we have a ceiling of no more than 10% with a target of 9%.
    • 01:02:50
      and we transfer the equivalent of one cent on the meals tax to the debt service fund to help fund the debt service.
    • 01:03:00
      So one of the things that on the 17% fund balance
    • 01:03:11
      that we maintain and I just completely lost my train of thought.
    • 01:03:14
      So I'm going to actually I'm going to pass it on to Kevin and I'll come back to whatever my thought was.
    • 01:03:21
      I apologize.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 01:03:22
      Okay, wanted to provide you with an overview of the city's outstanding debt.
    • 01:03:31
      We currently have 152 million of general obligation debt
    • 01:03:37
      but $93.9 million of that is supported by the general fund.
    • 01:03:43
      You have $58.4 million that you also issue general obligation bonds for but that's deemed self-supporting because that's relating to the utility system and you have a dedicated stream of revenue that pays that debt service and
    • 01:04:03
      The rating agencies actually allow us, if you've got a historical stream of revenue, to not really count that within our debt capacity limits.
    • 01:04:19
      And so when we get back a few slides back, when we're talking about debt capacity, we're talking about that $93.9 million of general fund-supported debt.
    • 01:04:32
      The city typically issues bonds annually, and Chrissy does a polling of the various departments and looking at the CIP, and we're really looking to fund projects 12 to 24 months out, and the chart there shows you our historical borrowing.
    • 01:04:51
      The dark blue is city capital projects.
    • 01:04:54
      The light blue is the utility projects that are self-supporting.
    • 01:04:59
      And then the red bars are the refinancings.
    • 01:05:03
      A typical bond issue has 10 years of call protection, but up until a few years ago, we were able to refinance bonds in advance of the call date in order to save the city money.
    • 01:05:19
      And as you can see on this slide there, since 2012, we've done numerous refinancings and saved about $4.6 million
    • 01:05:29
      and cash flow savings.
    • 01:05:31
      So we're constantly monitoring the city's debt portfolio and looking for those opportunities to save the city money.
    • 01:05:41
      As you can see on that chart too, over the last 10 years, we've averaged issuing about 9.6 million of general funds supported debt, a little larger issue in 21,
    • 01:05:57
      mainly due to the fact, really, the timing of COVID and everything.
    • 01:06:03
      We didn't issue in 20, so we did basically a double issuance there in 21.
    • 01:06:13
      Talk to you a second about the city's bond ratings.
    • 01:06:16
      You know, what a credit rating is, is an independent agency's view of the overall credit worthiness and ability to repay debt of the locality.
    • 01:06:29
      They try to standardize it to make that the bonds, you
    • 01:06:35
      You know, have liquidity.
    • 01:06:37
      So an agency or a municipality rated in California versus a municipality rated in Virginia, if they have similar ratings, they should get generally about the same interest rates.
    • 01:06:54
      And then the bond buyers can go in and buy them and, you know, may not even know much about the municipality that they're buying.
    • 01:07:02
      but they know the credit rating and obviously municipal debt there's very few defaults so they're typically very strong credit ratings compared to corporate debt but they do come in the different rating categories.
    • 01:07:23
      Charlottesville has the two highest possible ratings from Moody's and S&P have been rated AAA from S&P since 1964 and from Moody's from 1973.
    • 01:07:42
      There's a third rating agency out there, Fitch, that in my opinion the city would be rated AAA.
    • 01:07:50
      But you're already getting the lowest cost of financing by having these two long-standing AAAs.
    • 01:07:57
      So we've advised there's not necessarily a reason to go out and get the third AAA and pay a rating fee every time you do a bond issuance.
    • 01:08:08
      But these are as long-standing AAAs as I personally am aware of.
    • 01:08:15
      Yeah, so
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 01:08:19
      And, you know, this is something that I have heard many years that, you know, this incredible feat, you know, being so long to have this.
    • 01:08:28
      If you can just give me, and I'm sure that the public of anyone who's listening, like an example of what that means when we're borrowing money.
    • 01:08:38
      Let's just say for $100,000, if we had AAA, which we have as opposed to
    • 01:08:47
      You know, I don't know, a B or, you know, or double A or something like that.
    • 01:08:53
      Is it possible to give you like an example of what this means and how important it is to to maintain it?
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 01:09:00
      Yeah, it's actually the next the next bullet.
    • 01:09:03
      So it allows you to borrow at the lowest possible rate.
    • 01:09:07
      And so in this example, you know, your debt portfolio, we said was roughly around 100 million dollars.
    • 01:09:14
      If you were AA rated, that would have increased your total debt service by, you know, $3 to $4 million.
    • 01:09:24
      And certainly, interest rates have been very low for, you know, the AAA rated entities and the AA rated entities.
    • 01:09:33
      So that, I would say that $3 to $4 million is conservative.
    • 01:09:37
      If interest rates go up, the gap, the credit gap between
    • 01:09:41
      as AAA and AA widens further.
    • 01:09:45
      You know, if you took that, you know, the difference between AAA and single A, you'd probably be $10 million worth of debt service or, you know, a half million dollars a year that you'd be paying an extra interest cost.
    • 01:10:02
      So, you know, certainly the reason to maintain a high credit rating is allow you to get the lowest possible interest rates.
    • 01:10:10
      A secondary benefit that we've seen is that, you know, companies like dealing with highly rated partners.
    • 01:10:17
      And so, you know, when Chris Engel is talking to economic development prospects, I think it really does help to come in and know that you're, you know, dealing with a really high credit quality partner.
    • 01:10:32
      So we've heard that as well.
    • 01:10:33
      So,
    • 01:10:36
      It's definitely an advantage.
    • 01:10:38
      We take your ratings very seriously.
    • 01:10:39
      We talk to the rating agencies annually.
    • 01:10:43
      They'll check in.
    • 01:10:45
      Sometimes when there's a COVID event or on different things, we'll talk to them even perhaps more frequently, but at a minimum, we're on the phone with them annually.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 01:10:57
      Kevin, does it also make us a more attractive option?
    • 01:11:03
      So I know we don't necessarily
    • 01:11:06
      We talk about selling bonds, but I also know the bond market for sales has been a little bit soft.
    • 01:11:14
      I know a lot of financial advisors have been advising people to not necessarily invest in bonds because of the low interest rates and everything.
    • 01:11:22
      By having a AAA bond rating, does it make it more for others to decide that, yes, they will take the risk on us as part of their portfolio to actually buy our bonds?
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 01:11:36
      Yeah, I mean, you know, when we offer your bonds in the public, we get great response.
    • 01:11:43
      People like the name.
    • 01:11:45
      They realize it's a solid, has a solid track record.
    • 01:11:51
      And so, you know, when you're
    • 01:11:54
      when you're deciding whether you're buying a AAA bond or a AA bond, a lot of the bond funds have certain requirements.
    • 01:12:03
      So they'll say 20% of their portfolio is AAA and 30% AA and whatever.
    • 01:12:13
      So it does help to fall into that category that attracts people.
    • 01:12:21
      You know, others, you know, some others may take a little bit riskier of an investment to get a yield, but we've certainly never had any difficulty selling the city's bonds, you know, when credit events happen, they call it a flight to quality, where
    • 01:12:45
      All the A bonds or AA bonds that people were reaching a little bit, trying to get a little bit more yield, they'll come running back to the AAAs because they know that they're going to get their pay.
    • 01:13:00
      They're going to get paid.
    • 01:13:01
      Certainly, buying municipal bonds is completely different than investing in the stock market.
    • 01:13:09
      And so you're doing it because you want guaranteed return on
    • 01:13:15
      on your investment versus really trying to make a significant return on your money.
    • 01:13:21
      So it's a stable part of your portfolio.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 01:13:28
      Before we move on, I had one question on the prior page.
    • 01:13:32
      When you were talking about self-supporting bonds, if we were to get the sales tax bump for school construction and then issue bonds pursuant to that,
    • 01:13:44
      Would those bonds be regarded as self-supporting?
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 01:13:49
      Yes, I believe they would.
    • 01:13:51
      We'd have to talk to the rating agencies.
    • 01:13:53
      But when you can guarantee a dedicated stream of revenues, that it can't go anywhere else, that it's not council's discretion, then we'll be looking at
    • 01:14:07
      You know, and you would have some sort of coverage ratio because sales tax can be volatile.
    • 01:14:14
      Who knows if there's a next generation of COVID or anything out there.
    • 01:14:19
      But when you have a dedicated stream of revenues, it would be our goal to try to get those to be deemed self-supporting or a dedicated tax.
    • 01:14:30
      Thanks.
    • 01:14:36
      Chris, on the next slide is really gets to this, you know, between Moody's and Standard and Poor's, they rate thousands of municipalities.
    • 01:14:49
      And so the city is one of only 125 nationwide.
    • 01:14:51
      And I would say, I think Moody's does about 4,000
    • 01:14:58
      municipal ratings.
    • 01:15:00
      So, I mean, you are in the real elite company here.
    • 01:15:05
      There's 10 Virginia cities that maintain that.
    • 01:15:11
      Chesapeake just recently got rated AAA by Moody.
    • 01:15:15
      So there have been others joining
    • 01:15:19
      This also speaks to, you know, 10 of 125 nationwide is how high quality Virginia government is.
    • 01:15:27
      You know, certainly amongst the largest, Maryland, North Carolina has some, and then the rest are kind of spread out.
    • 01:15:38
      But, you know, the council should really be proud of the fact that you're
    • 01:15:44
      one of only 125 in the entire country that maintain the AAA, AAA status.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 01:15:52
      Is there any difference between the triple caps A and the capital A, small a, small a?
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 01:16:00
      No, it's just Moody's and the two bottom rows are inverse, so there's nothing why that is.
    • 01:16:09
      Moody's did it to really designate how they
    • 01:16:14
      rate it.
    • 01:16:16
      So like the next category for Moody's is big A, little a, one, and then for S&P it's double A plus.
    • 01:16:27
      There is no triple A one or triple A plus.
    • 01:16:32
      So we're at the highest possible category.
    • 01:16:36
      But I think Moody's just did it to distinguish themselves from S&P so somebody could look at it and tell
    • 01:16:43
      Fitch uses the same rating methodology as S&P.
    • 01:16:47
      So if somebody said, if you saw a big A, two little As and a triple A, three large As, you really, if you didn't know, you wouldn't be able to tell whether it's S&P or Fitch for the other ones.
    • 01:17:00
      So I think they just wanted to differentiate themselves from S&P.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 01:17:05
      So on this slide, the Moody's and S&P for Suffolk and Vienna should be reversed?
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 01:17:10
      Yes.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 01:17:10
      Okay.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 01:17:17
      to Vice Mayor Wade's question on the rating agencies.
    • 01:17:23
      They obviously rate the entire city and focus on everything about the city, but there's four key categories here, economy, management, financial, and debt.
    • 01:17:42
      So the economy is the one that
    • 01:17:45
      of these four rating factors that we really can't control.
    • 01:17:52
      It's about 30% of our grade.
    • 01:17:54
      And so I tell my clients to really make sure you focus on the other three that you can control.
    • 01:18:03
      But the benefit of the economy and why Charlottesville has been so highly rated for a long time is
    • 01:18:11
      You know, you've got great anchors in UVA and the hospital as well, just providing great stability in the area.
    • 01:18:21
      You know, you also got, you know, very long term, stable employment base, solid property values that continue to grow, you know, strong downtown area.
    • 01:18:35
      And so
    • 01:18:37
      Every few years we bring the rating analysts down and they're just very impressed with all that's going on in the city, but that's, you know, the economy is the one that, you know, things turn, you know, every report I see and when we do the rating agency presentations, they certainly talk about, you know, Charlottesville being one of the best places to live and relocate your business and all these other things.
    • 01:19:04
      So, you know, COVID may actually
    • 01:19:07
      The city may be actually a beneficiary of COVID and businesses getting out of the major metropolitan areas, but that's one area that we don't really control.
    • 01:19:22
      Management, that's what we're talking about today.
    • 01:19:26
      Your policies and procedures, your strategic planning, stuff like this is very important to
    • 01:19:34
      You know, council being in line with with staff, you know, obviously, we've had some change and turnover at the city manager level, and we'll get questions on that.
    • 01:19:47
      But the, you know, council being on the same page and doing planning exercises like this, and then your core
    • 01:19:56
      Staff, having the history and budget and economic development and finance is very important to the management score there.
    • 01:20:08
      Financial, the budget that we're talking about, making sure that your revenues
    • 01:20:13
      at least meet or exceed your expenditures and then your fund balances.
    • 01:20:18
      And you see that to the right, the policy that we talked about a couple of times, maintaining that 17% unassigned fund balance.
    • 01:20:30
      They get it.
    • 01:20:31
      I mean, they want you to have the rainy day fund
    • 01:20:35
      in there.
    • 01:20:36
      If, you know, if we ever needed to hit it, you know, your commitment to replenish it.
    • 01:20:42
      But having that, you know, if you run in a business, that working capital buffer in there is important.
    • 01:20:49
      And then the debt, you know, certainly a major topic for us today.
    • 01:20:54
      Our debt position has been extremely low
    • 01:21:00
      You know, over the years, that's going to be going up, as we saw, we've issued less than about $10 million a year, you know, and the cost of these capital projects is going up significantly, so they just want to see how you're going to fit that in, in terms of your planning and balancing, and Chrissy had talked about the debt ratio.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 01:21:28
      Any questions on those?
    • 01:21:32
      I had one, but Christy, just like you, it just went away.
    • 01:21:42
      I'm sorry, it's gone.
    • 01:21:43
      It'll come back.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 01:21:45
      I'm sorry.
    • 01:21:46
      Okay.
    • 01:21:47
      Let me know when it comes back, and I'll be glad to answer.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:21:52
      Thank you for not leaving me in a class by myself.
    • 01:21:55
      I appreciate that.
    • 01:21:57
      Actually, what I was going to mention to you when we were talking about these policies and the 17 percent, one thing that happens every year is that Chris Cullinan, the finance director, comes to you and presents the audit and the year-end results to you.
    • 01:22:14
      And we talk about a year-end surplus.
    • 01:22:19
      if we've done our job as well, right?
    • 01:22:22
      But anything over and above the 17%, we transfer to the CIP as additional PAYGO.
    • 01:22:31
      in addition to the 3% we budget for.
    • 01:22:34
      And so this has helped and it has also been a good point, talking point during the rating agencies that we continue to invest sort of the one-time money that we identify as a surplus into sort of one-time expenses in our capital project plan.
    • 01:22:58
      Anybody else have any other questions on this piece?
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 01:23:01
      Are there other things that we've used a surplus for?
    • 01:23:05
      I mean, so it sounds like the first component that has to be greater than 17% and then over that you're saying you typically put it in CIP, but there have been other things we've spent it on as well, right?
    • 01:23:18
      For instance, COLA increases and
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:23:20
      That's correct.
    • 01:23:21
      So that's really the exercise that Mr. Cullinan and his team work on is they determine what the surplus is.
    • 01:23:32
      The 17% comes off right off the top because we have to maintain that.
    • 01:23:37
      and then the anything over and above that is what he comes to council with and sometimes staff has recommendations things have come up during the year that we need to use some of those funds for sometimes council has things they want to use it for so we talked about
    • 01:23:54
      adding funds to the Council Strategic Initiatives Fund.
    • 01:23:58
      We've used it for that.
    • 01:24:00
      We've also used it for things like science labs at the schools, which were sort of one-time things.
    • 01:24:06
      So all of those are, you know, eligible and happen with that year-end process.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 01:24:14
      Thanks.
    • 01:24:15
      I'm sorry, Brian.
    • 01:24:17
      I remember my question.
    • 01:24:18
      With that 17%, and I understand that that is like a kind of...
    • 01:24:24
      funds that we need to kind of, as a reserve, I assume that is a considerable amount of money and it is or can be, you know, put it away where it can get, you know, interest or, you know, or, you know, we can, it can continue building wealth on top of it.
    • 01:24:49
      Is that, can we do that or are we doing that?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:24:54
      Kevin, do you want to address that or do you want me to?
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 01:24:57
      Yes, your treasurer would be investing any funds that you have on hand.
    • 01:25:02
      You have limitations on what you can invest in just as a governmental entity.
    • 01:25:08
      You couldn't put it in the stock market.
    • 01:25:13
      He does have a list of investments that he can, but certainly trying to grow it.
    • 01:25:19
      I mean, as you know, short-term rates have been extremely low.
    • 01:25:24
      for the past several years, but will be going up.
    • 01:25:27
      And so you'll see that interest earnings line item be a little bit lower, but you're winning on the borrowing side and you're losing on the reinvest side.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:25:41
      Yeah, and that interest is a line item in the budget that we do count in terms of getting to our bottom line.
    • 01:25:47
      And so, you know, we always, our attempt is always to budget conservatively.
    • 01:25:54
      And we're usually pretty close.
    • 01:25:57
      But in years when we're short, you know, or over, that is what sort of gets rolled up and is part of that year end process.
    • 01:26:07
      But we do count that.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 01:26:10
      Mr. Hamill, what is the sort of average surplus and I'm not sure maybe surplus is not not the best term to use, but these were leftover.
    • 01:26:21
      What is that average been over the last, say, five years?
    • 01:26:24
      Do you have a sense of that?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:26:28
      We do have a chart on that.
    • 01:26:29
      And so since I've already messed up numbers on a previous slide, what I'll say is that we typically talk about that in percent because sometimes when you talk about, oh, we had a $2 million surplus, that's a big number.
    • 01:26:47
      But when you look at it in terms of a total $190 million budget,
    • 01:26:52
      We typically, anything 5% or under, we consider we've done our job well.
    • 01:26:59
      And so we typically are, I would say, somewhere between 2% and 5%, but we can definitely send you that history.
    • SPEAKER_14
    • 01:27:06
      Thank you.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 01:27:12
      Yeah, and I know that's a delicate issue for municipalities of
    • 01:27:17
      wanting to get it right.
    • 01:27:18
      But I think as you can appreciate going through this whole process, there is a whole lot of moving numbers.
    • 01:27:26
      And a few years ago, we would have never even envisioned a COVID year where a couple of your major revenue drivers took significant hits.
    • 01:27:39
      So
    • 01:27:40
      You know, in Virginia, we're fortunate that real estate is a lot.
    • 01:27:44
      But, you know, if you look back to 08 and 09, there's significant movements in those revenue streams as well.
    • 01:27:51
      So by nature, governments just have to be conservative.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:28:06
      Any other questions before we move on?
    • 01:28:12
      Okay, hearing none.
    • 01:28:15
      We'll move into sort of an overview of the CIP.
    • 01:28:20
      Again, we have presented a proposal or proposed draft of the CIP to the Planning Commission.
    • 01:28:30
      Council has had participated in a joint meeting with the Planning Commission on that draft.
    • 01:28:37
      and we are still you know the Planning Commission made some recommendations to the city managers and we have been working on those so we'll talk about this a little bit overview of the CIP
    • 01:28:53
      For presentation purposes, we're going to talk about a few different subsections of that, which is not necessarily individual projects, but we'll talk to you about this sort of authorized but not issued.
    • 01:29:06
      So these are projects that through various CIPs, the Council has designated those as projects that we would plan to sell bonds for those.
    • 01:29:18
      Right now we have an authorized but not issued list of roughly $66 million and we'll talk about that.
    • 01:29:28
      The second piece is the revised proposed CIP.
    • 01:29:32
      So that's the 2023-2027.
    • 01:29:34
      That's the five-year plan.
    • 01:29:37
      It includes a funding plan for both projects that we plan to sell bonds for and projects that we plan to use the PAYGO or the cash for that we've talked to you about.
    • 01:29:49
      And it also includes the $75 million for the school reconfiguration project.
    • 01:29:56
      So the current draft of that five-year plan totals 157 million, of which roughly 124 million of that could be bonded.
    • 01:30:09
      And then there's this unfunded project list.
    • 01:30:13
      That includes capital projects that not just this year, but sort of have had a recurring request that have not made it to the CIP and have not been funded.
    • 01:30:26
      We do send that out every year as part of the CIP process.
    • 01:30:29
      We send that back out to departments and ask them to confirm that they're still
    • 01:30:34
      viable projects that they wish to put forward.
    • 01:30:37
      And that list right now currently totals about 127 million.
    • 01:30:46
      So as we move to the CIP authorized but not issued list, again, this is just a running list of projects that if you were to go back through prior CIPs, this is a list of projects that were designated in that bondable portion.
    • 01:31:07
      Um, and they, these are projects that either haven't started, um, have started, um, and we haven't sold, we've sold some of the bonds, but not all of the bonds, um, have just started and they're not, they haven't, you know, haven't, um, coincided with our bond sale schedule and so they get picked up in the new one.
    • 01:31:27
      So there's a little bit of a nuance here in terms of the dollars that you see here.
    • 01:31:34
      It's not it's it's not a safe bet to look at this list and say, OK, well, I have general district court at six point seven million.
    • 01:31:44
      It's still out here.
    • 01:31:46
      And so I'm going to we're not going to do that.
    • 01:31:47
      We're going to take that off the list.
    • 01:31:49
      And now we've got six point seven million we can buy for something else.
    • 01:31:52
      In some cases, you certainly can.
    • 01:31:54
      In other cases, it's just a matter of by the time we do the next bond sale, we've probably spent, you know, a couple million dollars on that that we'll be picking up and selling.
    • 01:32:05
      So again, this is meant to be a guide.
    • 01:32:09
      And basically what this list as a council member is advising you of is these are projects that either were just
    • 01:32:21
      So if we looked at the end of this list, for example, some of these are brand new from the 22 CIP and we just haven't been able to get the project into a state where we're ready to sell the bonds because we typically don't sell the bonds until either one, we are incurring the project has started and we're incurring expenses or we know that the project will be started
    • 01:32:48
      and all of the money will be spent within 24 months.
    • 01:32:51
      So there's a lot of sort of nuance and research to do here, but this should lead as a guide to say, hey, what have we committed to in the past in terms of our bond capacity?
    • 01:33:06
      And as we talk about trade-offs and setting priorities, this is a good place to start.
    • 01:33:12
      You know, for example,
    • 01:33:15
      if you just wanted to pick one and we did the Seventh Street deck in prior CIPs we had I don't remember the numbers exactly but there's at least a million dollars we said we were going to bond for that that we haven't now there was also in the 23 CIP additional money for that project because sometimes we fund projects over multiple years
    • 01:33:41
      that you'll see in the next version based on conversations from the Planning Commission, we've removed those dollars out of the new dollars out of the budget.
    • 01:33:52
      So again, it's meant to be a guide.
    • 01:33:55
      Sometimes there, I know in previous conversations,
    • 01:34:02
      Mayor Snook has brought up the idea about lump sum accounts and their big dollars there and why are they still there and not bonded.
    • 01:34:12
      Sometimes it's because we're building up a savings and so there might be one project that'll take most of that.
    • 01:34:20
      Sometimes in this case because of COVID we had lots of pauses
    • 01:34:26
      and delays on projects.
    • 01:34:29
      And so they haven't gotten started.
    • 01:34:32
      And I know on a previous list, which I've addressed this.
    • 01:34:37
      So this was a working list for me.
    • 01:34:39
      And every year we have lump sum accounts that we appropriate standing dollars.
    • 01:34:45
      We have that for facilities, we have it for schools.
    • 01:34:48
      And so we have pots for like FY17 and pots for FY18 and 20.
    • 01:34:54
      and as facilities creates their project list they're drawing from different pots depending on how they're assigning those projects but what I did here to kind of and so I had those years listed separately what I've done now is combine that so you'll see sort of lump sums in like here's the last one the facilities lump sum
    • 01:35:17
      4.1 million.
    • 01:35:18
      Doesn't mean that that's money they haven't spent.
    • 01:35:21
      It's just bonds that were allocated that we haven't sold yet.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 01:35:27
      Chrissy, I have a few things real quick.
    • 01:35:30
      When I first started on council, we approved a radio system upgrade.
    • 01:35:37
      What happened?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:35:38
      So great question because that kind of leads to what I'm trying to articulate here.
    • 01:35:45
      This is a joint project for the ECC radio upgrade project that has been going on for multiple years.
    • 01:35:57
      It had a series of delays early on and they're well into that project now.
    • 01:36:02
      And so, but we're just starting to get bills for that.
    • 01:36:05
      And so because we haven't gotten the bills, we haven't sold the bonds.
    • 01:36:10
      So now that we're getting the bills, we'll be selling the bonds for this.
    • 01:36:14
      And as they, you know, as that project winds down, we may or may not need all of these.
    • 01:36:19
      And then that will get recycled back into calculation that we're going to show you a little bit later in terms of how we figure out what our capacity is.
    • 01:36:30
      I think what you're recalling though specifically is we allocated some money for handheld portable radios.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 01:36:37
      Okay.
    • 01:36:37
      It was surplus money.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:36:38
      Yeah, correct.
    • 01:36:40
      And those are, were not bondable.
    • 01:36:42
      We just paid for that with cash and they were city public safety handheld radios.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 01:36:48
      And my second point is I see some things on here already that might
    • 01:36:54
      we might be able to target with the Build Back Better plan and grants coming in in particular.
    • 01:37:00
      I know there's very specific grants coming out for city bridges that are not VDOTs that are actually within the municipality that we can't get VDOT money for.
    • 01:37:16
      And it looks like we have a couple of projects that might qualify for that.
    • 01:37:20
      I just wanna make sure people are very aware
    • 01:37:23
      that a lot of these we might be able to get some outside funding to assist with too.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:37:28
      Yeah, great point.
    • 01:37:29
      And, you know, I think that that is one of the things we'll talk about in the CIP work session because again, you know, we have lots of projects and lots of ideas and lots of things in the pike.
    • 01:37:44
      We're fortunate in many ways, though, we also have a lot of moving parts in terms of how we can do that.
    • 01:37:50
      So, again, this authorized but not issued list sort of reflects prior planning in terms of the CIP, but you'll recall from this past year-end appropriation that Mr. Cullinan brought to you all,
    • 01:38:07
      We had deferred our cash transfer to the CIP in 21 due to COVID and we were able to mitigate expenses and everything on the general fund side and so we actually with the year end appropriation put that back in contingency.
    • 01:38:24
      So that is cash that is available for you to allocate.
    • 01:38:29
      We also have the ARPA funds.
    • 01:38:31
      There's a large percent of that that has not been allocated by council yet of the first tranche.
    • 01:38:38
      And then also we'll be getting a second tranche.
    • 01:38:41
      So there's plans and conversations to happen with that.
    • 01:38:44
      I think schools will have opportunities with some federal funding from ARP as well.
    • 01:38:52
      And so there's a lot of moving parts and pieces to this.
    • 01:38:57
      And we will be talking about all of that as we work through this process and beyond.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 01:39:02
      This is just a general question.
    • 01:39:06
      Ms.
    • 01:39:06
      Hamill, who is there a
    • 01:39:10
      group within the city is that within city manager's office, perhaps that is sort of coordinating all of these various grants from ARP and build back better and sort of keeping an eye on the landscape and how that might backfill some of our projects.
    • 01:39:24
      Since I've been on board, I've heard a lot of different conversations about specific grants and clearly people are keeping up with with this at some level, but I'm wondering if there's like an integrated sort of clearing house.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:39:36
      There is.
    • 01:39:37
      Our finance director, Chris Cullinan, is the point person on the CARES funding.
    • 01:39:41
      He also is the point person on the ARPA funds.
    • 01:39:43
      Part of the thing that we're finding out is that the dollars were allocated by
    • 01:39:56
      But the rules by which we have to abide in order to spend those have been sort of slow to evolve and roll out.
    • 01:40:03
      And so much of this guidance is either still in draft form or just being released.
    • 01:40:12
      And he has the onerous task that he wades through a lot of this stuff and that he then filters through the budget team and works with city management and
    • 01:40:25
      you know we bring those I think he's on the third or fourth appropriation that comes to council so council actually blesses how those dollars are spent with you know we bring a memo and a recommendation and then council has the opportunity to weigh in on those before any of that happens.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 01:40:44
      Is there a document that I could get a link to or something that sort of explains from maybe just the last year or two years sort of
    • 01:40:56
      what grants have come into the system and how we've used them just be helpful to me then.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:41:01
      Sure.
    • 01:41:02
      I can reach out to Mr. Cullinan on that.
    • 01:41:05
      And at a minimum, we can certainly trace back the council memo, agenda memos, which itemize what we've used those dollars on and get them to you.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 01:41:17
      So do I understand that everything that is on this ABNI list
    • 01:41:22
      is something that council has at some point in some prior budget said yes to.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:41:28
      Correct.
    • 01:41:29
      That is correct.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 01:41:31
      I will tell you from my own personal perspective, once we've said yes to it, I kind of forget about it.
    • 01:41:38
      I assume that it's going to get done.
    • 01:41:40
      And so
    • 01:41:43
      While I understand that there are some projects, the Belmont Bridge being one that comes immediately to mind that may have been approved a long time ago, we recently reapproved it with a different amount of money and so on.
    • 01:41:56
      I guess, but then when we start talking about budget constraints and are there things from this list that could be deleted, that gets me nervous because it suggests
    • 01:42:13
      that just because council said yes to it at some point doesn't actually mean it's going to get done.
    • 01:42:19
      It means that somebody, hopefully at the council level, someplace anyway, is riding herd on these things, pushing them along, as opposed to the sense that I get of riding herd and perhaps trying to figure out if maybe we don't have to do that after all.
    • 01:42:40
      And I'm just, I'm
    • 01:42:43
      I guess where I run into trouble with this is trying to figure out what I'm supposed to do with this list.
    • 01:42:49
      Am I supposed to say, gosh darn it, here's $66 million that you should have been spending.
    • 01:42:55
      Why the heck haven't you spent it?
    • 01:42:58
      Or am I supposed to be looking at it and saying, well, okay, I know we said $66 million, but geez, let's see if we can't cut some of that.
    • 01:43:05
      How am I supposed to look at this?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:43:08
      Fair point.
    • 01:43:09
      And I think West Main Street is a perfect example of that.
    • 01:43:13
      So if we had looked at this list last year, it was a higher number because we had 18 and a quarter million dollars on this list for West Main Street.
    • 01:43:25
      We know that there were design work and some preliminary steps, but for all intents and purposes, no work really happened there.
    • 01:43:33
      and as we you know started talking about the school project and how could we get to where we need to be that was a perfect project that sort of bubbled to the top that's like hey here's a big number we're sitting on where are we with this this project let's reevaluate so I think sitting in your seat
    • 01:43:58
      What I suggest with this list is that you look through here and if there's something that, you know, just as you said, like, why did we allocate, you know, Belmont Bridge is an easy one, for example, $12 million.
    • 01:44:12
      Well, we know construction just started.
    • 01:44:14
      So you can look at that and say, yeah, I know that's not it.
    • 01:44:18
      But what you could say is, hey, undergrounding utilities, $4.4 million.
    • 01:44:24
      What is that for?
    • 01:44:25
      And let staff come back to you and and tell you, hey, you know, here's 4.4 that's on the authorized but not issued list.
    • 01:44:33
      And here's the status of that.
    • 01:44:35
      You know, here's why we haven't sold bonds.
    • 01:44:38
      And there may be things, you know, the counselor McGill's comment about the 800 megahertz radio system.
    • 01:44:47
      Why is that here?
    • 01:44:48
      We know we just did that.
    • 01:44:49
      Well, that's been on here for a long time, but there's been a lot of delays and that's actually a joint project that we don't have anything to do with in terms of how that progresses.
    • 01:44:58
      So I think this is just meant to be a tool for you to be aware of.
    • 01:45:04
      Hey, you know, here's things you said you were going to sell bonds on.
    • 01:45:08
      It's part of the equation in terms of what we can do in the past, because we can't, you know, we have to, we're trying to define for you, like what your capacity is.
    • 01:45:20
      And in doing that, we have to sort of keep track of what has previously been committed, but not executed yet.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 01:45:30
      At one level, the temptation is great.
    • 01:45:34
      For me, because I have what I've sometimes reduced a bathtub brain, I put it in the plug, I fill it up with everything I need to know on a particular topic.
    • 01:45:44
      Once the decision is made, I pull the plug, it all drains out.
    • 01:45:48
      can fill it up again and think about something else.
    • 01:45:50
      So what that means is if one of the like Belmont Bridge, you know, that's something we already decided.
    • 01:45:56
      I pulled the plug on it.
    • 01:45:57
      I've it's gone.
    • 01:46:01
      And so or perhaps a better analogy would be once we've cast the vote, I think the basketball game is over.
    • 01:46:10
      But what you're telling me is there's still five minutes left on the clock.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:46:14
      I would say, if you want to use that analogy, I would say there's maybe a couple seconds left on the clock.
    • 01:46:22
      Because, you know, I think for the most part, all of these are viable projects that you plan on moving ahead with.
    • 01:46:30
      And honestly, if you look through this list, there's really not a lot that you could say, I don't want to do.
    • 01:46:38
      or we're not going to do.
    • 01:46:39
      So this is not meant to be sort of a wish list for you to kind of go through line by line and say, nope, nope, nope, nope, nope.
    • 01:46:48
      Or I'm going to change my mind on this.
    • 01:46:49
      I think it's right.
    • 01:46:50
      And I think that's a fair assumption that, you know, when a budget comes to you and you all approve it, it's kind of on staff to make that happen.
    • 01:46:59
      This, again, is just to make you aware that, hey, this is what you said yes to before.
    • 01:47:04
      And it
    • 01:47:06
      You know, look through here and if there's something that jumps out, then, you know, maybe you want to ask a question, but I don't think this is necessarily a source of funds as much as this is just more of an awareness of prior obligations.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 01:47:19
      Well, to be fair, most of the things on here, no member of council ever voted for.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:47:27
      That is absolutely correct.
    • 01:47:28
      I mean, I would say that it's because the list is chronological, but I can tell you like some of these account like the underground and utilities account.
    • 01:47:38
      I know that I think I started keeping track of this list in 2006.
    • 01:47:42
      And I can tell you that there are dollars that were allocated in budgets.
    • 01:47:48
      from 2006 forward at some point for undergrounding utilities.
    • 01:47:54
      Now, it doesn't mean they're in this 4.4 million because, you know, as we sell bonds, I'm clicking it off.
    • 01:47:59
      But this list is fairly chronological in terms of that because the new projects get added to the end.
    • 01:48:05
      So most of this second page, you know, I think Riverview restrooms were like in the 21 budget.
    • 01:48:14
      down, you know, so most all of this is the 22 budget.
    • 01:48:19
      But you're to your point, like the majority of it is beyond is most definitely beyond this council.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 01:48:26
      One thing that might be helpful I use as an example from what I just recently went off the Water and Sewer Authority Board is that basically quarterly we get an update on everything that would be on their capital budget for the next 30 years.
    • SPEAKER_01
    • 01:48:47
      Oh, 30 years.
    • 01:48:49
      Come on, Lloyd, we're just getting to five.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 01:48:52
      Because they obviously have capital needs, they need to project 30 years, but they've made the plans, and they tell us every quarter or so, here's the status of this, this, this, this, and this, so that it reminds us of what's coming.
    • 01:49:08
      And once the list is created, it's easy to maintain on a quarterly basis.
    • 01:49:14
      It probably was a hassle the first time it had to be done.
    • 01:49:17
      But something like that might be helpful for going forward, but we don't need it by this March, but maybe as we work on new processes, that would be helpful because this is, as you know from my questions to you over the last couple of years, this is something that I've had a hard time wrapping my mind around.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:49:35
      Absolutely.
    • 01:49:36
      And we are working on that.
    • 01:49:39
      My colleague, Brian Ray, if you haven't had an opportunity, I'll make you aware of the Budget Explorer link that's on our budget website that we were just able to recently add that breaks down the general fund budget down to the line item and department level.
    • 01:49:56
      We have great plans to do more things like that.
    • 01:50:00
      And definitely one of those is the CIP.
    • 01:50:04
      And we also are looking at more sort of open data kind of initiatives.
    • 01:50:10
      And so we hear you.
    • 01:50:14
      We've gotten questions from the public on that.
    • 01:50:16
      And that is something we're working towards.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 01:50:20
      Ms.
    • 01:50:21
      Hamill, is it possible to
    • 01:50:24
      Maybe this will be part of the open data project that you just mentioned, the portal, which is actually pretty slick and neat, what's already up there.
    • 01:50:33
      But for this list in particular, is it worth staff going through and maybe having a separate column over here to the right of when this was put up, what your sort of best sense of whether this is still a viable
    • 01:50:51
      Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch
    • 01:51:19
      But at the same time, if there are elements here that would just nothing has happened over the last five years, I think we owe it to the public to understand why and whether it's still viable.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:51:33
      Yeah, in fact, part of the process that we go through when we get ready to sell bonds every year, we send out a spreadsheet which itemizes all the projects that are quote unquote on the books with their budgets, their expenses, and it goes out to departments and project managers and we ask them to provide us with a status update of that project.
    • 01:52:02
      and to also provide us with a spending plan because at that point we use that information to size the bond so we know how many to sell every year so we do that process and we do maintain that you know part of the
    • 01:52:19
      One problem with that, or not problem, but one of the tricky points with that is some projects that are really large, we budget over multiple years.
    • 01:52:30
      And so sometimes, you know, we may have a budget on the books for three or four years before we ever get the total dollars to be able to
    • 01:52:40
      Payne for that.
    • 01:52:42
      And so then in other cases, like VDOT projects, which tend to be very large dollar projects, are largely funded by state and federal dollars as passed through from VDOT, but it ends up with very large balances on the books because the funding sort of streams in over their six-year plan.
    • 01:53:03
      So
    • 01:53:04
      Again, you know, there's lots of moving parts, but we do follow up with staff and staff does provide updates and status updates and spin rate projections on all the projects at least once a year, if not more.
    • 01:53:18
      So we do have that that we could share.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 01:53:24
      I think one takeaway for today in this planning exercise is I started by saying you had relatively low debt, $94 million outstanding.
    • 01:53:33
      If you added this 66 to it of committed projects, whether it's a little less and we get grants or not, we're still in that $160 million range.
    • 01:53:48
      So as we move to the next category of the CIP,
    • 01:53:52
      We just kind of wanted to reset that base.
    • 01:53:55
      We're not paying debt service on this $66 million of authorized unissued, which is good.
    • 01:54:02
      I think y'all have taken a very diligent approach of not borrowing until the project is ready to go on municipal bonds.
    • 01:54:09
      You really don't want to do that.
    • 01:54:10
      There's IRS regulations.
    • 01:54:12
      You really want to be spending your bonds within two years of when you
    • 01:54:17
      two to three years of when you when you borrow and things do change.
    • 01:54:24
      But I think that's I think that's important that we're really kind of in that that hundred and sixty million dollar range.
    • 01:54:34
      You know, if we were borrowing, we'd be paying interest.
    • 01:54:37
      We wouldn't be earning money on much money on the on the investing of it.
    • 01:54:42
      So we'd be losing some money on it.
    • 01:54:44
      So I think it's
    • 01:54:45
      It's good to have the projects fully lined up before you borrow for it.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:54:55
      Any more questions on this list before we move on?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 01:54:59
      One question I guess I would have as a procedural one is I don't know how you feel we're doing in terms of time.
    • 01:55:07
      I also am noting that the next eight or 10 pages of our slides here
    • 01:55:15
      refer to details of the CIP, and I don't know whether it's appropriate for us to be getting bogged down in the nitty-gritty of those projects or whether that's a discussion to have later on in February.
    • 01:55:28
      What's your thought?
    • 01:55:29
      What's your plan here?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:55:30
      No, great thought.
    • 01:55:32
      The next few slides on the CIP were more or less intended to
    • 01:55:39
      just be a reference if we needed to.
    • 01:55:41
      So we're going to move through some of those pretty quickly, and it wasn't intended to discuss a lot of detail.
    • 01:55:47
      This is just kind of a...
    • 01:55:50
      complicated piece of it.
    • 01:55:52
      And so, you know, I'll move on to your point.
    • 01:55:55
      This is the proposed CIP.
    • 01:55:58
      Again, this is what you've seen this before.
    • 01:56:01
      This is online.
    • 01:56:04
      I'll just point out a few changes that city management and staff have made based on recommendations.
    • 01:56:13
      from the Planning Commission to point out just a couple of things.
    • 01:56:18
      The one big one is that under bondable projects, under transportation and access, the first draft that we showed to you included roughly about $1.3 million.
    • 01:56:33
      I think it was not roughly.
    • 01:56:34
      It was exactly $1.3 million for a
    • 01:56:40
      that was originally allocated for the parking garage and we had included left that much in the draft to address any agreement that we have with the county on the parking agreement for the courts.
    • 01:56:53
      Based on further discussions and recommendations from the Planning Commission, this draft takes that out
    • 01:57:02
      That agreement, to my knowledge, has not been finalized and that's still being worked on.
    • 01:57:08
      But at this point, we will think that we can address those needs with money that has previously been allocated for the parking garage that will now just be redirected to that agreement.
    • 01:57:21
      So that is now gone from here.
    • 01:57:25
      couple of other things in on the there was a recommendation to restore the funding for sidewalks.
    • 01:57:36
      We did put money back in to level fund that with 22.
    • 01:57:41
      And one of the other recommendations were to
    • 01:57:47
      Add money back in for to mitigate the ash tree removal process that is now fully funded at the requested rate in this draft.
    • 01:57:58
      And additionally, there was a suggestion that we not we reduce the funding in the economic strategic initiatives account that has been reduced both in 23
    • 01:58:11
      and slightly reduced in the future years.
    • 01:58:14
      So just want to highlight a few of those that based on those recommendations, we are trying to work some of those in.
    • 01:58:22
      And so the current draft has changed slightly.
    • 01:58:26
      But to get down to a total, we have a five year plan that's, you know, $157 million with just under 120 or just over 124 that that we would see as being eligible for bonds.
    • 01:58:47
      um so moving on again we've talked about the unfunded list um all of this is you've seen this before there's no changes here this is sort of a chronological list of things that have been submitted um that are still appear to be viable projects um
    • 01:59:05
      You know, to steal the words of of counselor Payne.
    • 01:59:09
      This is sort of your list of trade offs.
    • 01:59:12
      These are the things that are not in a plan anywhere.
    • 01:59:15
      But, you know, are things that based on decisions that you ultimately make and adopting a proposed CIP are left unfunded and would not move forward.
    • 01:59:31
      and to kind of sort of give you an overview of all of that.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 01:59:37
      I'm sorry, Chrissy, just a quick follow up to that.
    • 01:59:39
      So would those projects be part of that 30-year plan that Lloyd mentioned a few minutes ago?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 01:59:47
      Perhaps, perhaps, yeah.
    • 01:59:52
      So to kind of wrap all this together, as you think about how this works, we've talked to you about council's major funding priorities.
    • 02:00:02
      Are you putting your money where your mouth is?
    • 02:00:04
      And I think we've shown you that chart that had the green highlights.
    • 02:00:08
      And in terms of the CIP, we're funding, you know, at levels of
    • 02:00:16
      that indicate that your three priorities are education, transportation and access, and affordable housing.
    • 02:00:23
      So if we break those categories down a little bit, the middle column where we say revised proposed CIP, you'll see that education is number one,
    • 02:00:33
      Affordable Housing comes in number two, and Transportation comes in number three.
    • 02:00:37
      So those are things that in the current plan are funded.
    • 02:00:41
      That makes up the $122 million of the bondable piece.
    • 02:00:49
      Well, not all of it's bondable.
    • 02:00:50
      I'm gonna take that back.
    • 02:00:51
      That makes up 122 million of the total 157 that we have budgeted.
    • 02:00:57
      Then we talked about the authorized but not issued.
    • 02:01:00
      And so if we looked at those three categories, like what's on that list that is in the works, and you see that listed here.
    • 02:01:09
      And then in terms of what is currently funded,
    • 02:01:14
      That is the total of those two, and then what is unfunded.
    • 02:01:18
      And you'll see how that falls out in those top three categories.
    • 02:01:25
      So as we talk about priorities, trade-offs, decisions going forward, this is kind of a very high level of a scenario of where your money's going, what's kind of being left out, and what's still in progress.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:01:44
      Ms.
    • 02:01:44
      Hamill, I know we're not going to drill into specifics, but at this point, this is including the $75 million notional costs for the schools.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:01:56
      That is correct.
    • 02:01:56
      So the 75 is in that $85 million number in the middle column noted as revised proposed CIP.
    • SPEAKER_14
    • 02:02:04
      Okay, thank you.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 02:02:07
      Any questions here?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:02:12
      So I'm going to turn this over to Kevin.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 02:02:14
      All right.
    • 02:02:18
      A lot of numbers on this page and want to make sure that everybody understands this because this is really a key page in our planning process.
    • 02:02:31
      The light blue second column bond issuance amount just shows estimated figures.
    • 02:02:38
      We just saw a lot of
    • 02:02:40
      a lot of capital costs, but we're just making estimated guesses of when we're going to be actually bonding for these amounts, and then when we have to start paying debt service on this.
    • 02:02:52
      So, you know, the numbers we were just looking at, and part of this is solving to keep us at right around that 10%, the far right-hand capacity, far right-hand column is that debt capacity.
    • 02:03:07
      ratio that we talked about of our goal being in the 9% range, but not to exceed 10%.
    • 02:03:16
      And so this kind of says, you know, solves for that debt capacity.
    • 02:03:20
      How much can we borrow to keep right around that 10%?
    • 02:03:26
      And so the second column over there, if you total all those numbers up, it's $185 million.
    • 02:03:32
      which is in the range of that 66 million of authorized but not issued.
    • 02:03:42
      And then the 120 to 125-ish of the revised proposed CIP.
    • 02:03:50
      And again, not getting into any of the unfunded.
    • 02:03:53
      But so this shows a drawdown basis of $25 million issues in 22, 23, 25, six, and seven.
    • 02:04:03
      and then the larger borrowing, you know, presumably for schools of $60 million range in 24, you will notice here that in order to, you know, you exceed that ratio.
    • 02:04:18
      And so we actually go a couple years without borrowing and then start borrowing at modest amounts.
    • 02:04:26
      And we can run whatever examples of this you want.
    • 02:04:30
      So
    • 02:04:31
      You know, in terms of keeping within the capacity, that number is in $100, $185 million range.
    • 02:04:40
      Now, turning the table to affordability, that's really that third column, the annual debt service.
    • 02:04:47
      We're currently paying about $11.9 million in our FY22 budget, right there, the highlighted number.
    • 02:04:58
      And so as we bring on this debt, it shows if we issue that $185 million of debt, our debt service is basically doubling and we need to find revenue sources for an additional $11 million to pay debt service.
    • 02:05:18
      The one other point, and I'll be glad to answer any questions I'd make on this, is that that ratio to the right is incumbent upon our general fund budget.
    • 02:05:27
      And we're showing, you know, some healthy growth in the general fund budget, you know, one and a half percent, two percent with meals.
    • 02:05:37
      You see a pretty big jump between 22 and 23 for the estimated assessment growth in there.
    • 02:05:44
      And then in 24, some sort of tax increase revenue generation to be able to pay for the for the large debt issuance.
    • 02:05:56
      The tricky part of this ratio is if the economy turns and our budget contracts at all, our debt service is going to be fixed and our ratio is going to go up because the general fund expenditures either stays flat, doesn't grow or even contracts.
    • 02:06:18
      So it's a little bit of a tricky ratio because a tougher economy
    • 02:06:25
      Council may make some decisions to tighten up the budget, but that actually hurts that ratio.
    • 02:06:34
      And so a lot of numbers on this page, but glad to answer any questions of the methodologies.
    • 02:06:40
      And this is certainly something Chrissy and I can run easily if you say what other scenarios you'd like to see.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:06:49
      What assumption do you make about the interest rate for the future bonds?
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 02:06:55
      Yeah, Chrissy, what are we?
    • 02:06:57
      Four percent?
    • 02:06:58
      Are we four to four percent?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:07:01
      Yeah, I think we tiered that in this one.
    • 02:07:05
      I think we were at three for 23, and then we finally bumped it up to a max of four.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:07:16
      And we're currently, the last bonds we issued were at one point something.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 02:07:22
      Yeah, your current borrowing rate on this issue that's coming up would be in probably two and a quarter rate.
    • 02:07:31
      Interest rates have trended up some.
    • 02:07:34
      Hopefully, you know, that's a very conservative assumption.
    • 02:07:37
      The expectation is that the Fed's going to raise shorter term interest rates and
    • 02:07:44
      Who knows what's going to happen with inflation, but that rates are generally trending up.
    • 02:07:50
      But hopefully we're able to borrow a large part of this sub 3%.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:07:58
      So in other words, the calculations of annual debt service would seem to be a little on the high end of an average range or an expected range?
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 02:08:11
      Yeah, yes, I would agree with that.
    • 02:08:13
      They're conservative.
    • 02:08:14
      Okay.
    • 02:08:15
      Thank you.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:08:17
      Question, please.
    • 02:08:18
      So the first question is wondering if this is an appropriate way to conceptualize what we're going to need in terms of the elusive revenue enhancements.
    • 02:08:30
      If we take, say, an annual debt service of the last five years or so as roughly $10 million annually, and then we say,
    • 02:08:42
      in 2023 or 2022 is when we're starting to be more expansive in terms of programs like affordable housing or schools in particular.
    • 02:08:54
      Is it fair to say then that the Delta, the increased revenue that we're going to need to handle those extra commitments, hopefully, is
    • 02:09:05
      about $2 million more in 2022, about three and a half.
    • 02:09:10
      In other words, just sort of a rough way of thinking about this, the actual commitments or the actual revenue we're going to have to go get up over and above what we've done historically.
    • 02:09:19
      I don't know if that makes any sense.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 02:09:23
      That's right.
    • 02:09:25
      Looking at this chart on a debt service perspective, that's correct.
    • 02:09:30
      Obviously, you want to
    • 02:09:32
      understand whether there's any operational costs that come with these various projects that would impact your budget.
    • 02:09:41
      And the one thing we'll talk about a little bit later too is you have a debt service fund currently about $11.9 million that Chrissy uses to smooth the increases in there.
    • 02:10:01
      So
    • 02:10:02
      you've got that as an additional revenue source and then any rate increases and I'll show you a slide and a couple pages on what a penny is worth.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:10:18
      Yeah, thank you for that.
    • 02:10:19
      So I guess just as I'm thinking through this, if this were a spreadsheet that I had and I were to insert a column between the annual debt service and general fund expenditure,
    • 02:10:29
      and basically deduct or reduce by $10 million.
    • 02:10:38
      The annual debt service has sort of been historic for the last decade or so.
    • 02:10:43
      Then whatever that incremental cost is going from roughly 2022 to 2032, that would be sort of the net extra that we were going to have to pay to pull off some of these programs that we want to do.
    • 02:10:58
      I don't know if that makes any sense at all, but you see my point, Mr. Allen?
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 02:11:04
      Yeah, no, I hear what you're saying.
    • 02:11:06
      I think that is, you know, basically correct.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:11:13
      I think that might be helpful information as we're sort of thinking through what the real net add is going to be.
    • 02:11:22
      And then the other point you've made about the percentage here that you've got in yellow
    • 02:11:29
      So if we, I guess the point there is, even if we feel like we can manage what we're on the hook for with our bonds and debt service, if we have to lower the general fund budget because of a retraction in the economy, that percentage could go significantly higher, I guess, than 10%, even if we're able to meet our basic commitments.
    • 02:11:59
      The notion there, I guess, is that that impacts our bond rating?
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 02:12:04
      Yeah, you know, the, you know, part of this is it impacts your ability to pay for other things in the budget.
    • 02:12:14
      I mean, the 10%, you know, when you think of like 22, it's at 6%.
    • 02:12:19
      So you're paying 6% to debt service, you're paying 94% to other things.
    • 02:12:28
      And then in, you know, 28, you're paying 10% to debt service and 90% to other things, you know, and so if you shrink the budget, and now that becomes 12% to 88%, I mean, you're having to cut programs, cut pay, cut stuff, because, you know, the debt service is the first bill that you're paying.
    • 02:12:54
      And, you know, and then you're doing stuff without it.
    • 02:12:57
      So,
    • 02:12:58
      You know, I don't want the 10% is it's not a fire alarm if we go over it.
    • 02:13:05
      It's just a good practice of what other governments of you need 90% to operate the government and no more than 10% to be, you know, going to debt service or it just starts hurting you because as you, you know, are seeing in your budget.
    • 02:13:25
      So much, so little of your budget is really discretionary.
    • 02:13:29
      There's just so much fixed cost in a governmental budget.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:13:34
      Got it.
    • 02:13:35
      And I guess because that fits within our financial policy, the credit agencies would begin to raise questions about our, is that a reasonable thing to be afraid of?
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 02:13:47
      Yeah, they're just asking questions.
    • 02:13:52
      You know, I think that I think the, you know, everything on your project list is, you know, viable projects and they're tough decisions.
    • 02:14:01
      So I mean, you know, it's not this isn't an easy process of you've got to provide these key governmental services, or they should be asking questions about that.
    • 02:14:12
      I think the ultimate message here is that
    • 02:14:17
      You know, our debt is relatively low today.
    • 02:14:20
      We've got a lot of authorized but unissued debt on, you know, valid projects.
    • 02:14:27
      So we've got really limited capacity going forward.
    • 02:14:32
      And we just want to make sure how we're spending that capacity and knowing that, you know, in future years, you know, we may be constrained.
    • 02:14:45
      In this example, a couple years of not borrowing, where at a minimum, the cities typically borrow $10 million a year for just general, you know, even almost maintenance needs.
    • 02:15:01
      You know, so like, you know, one thing on the schools, not to pick on them, but, you know, on the unfunded list is Charlottesville High School roof.
    • 02:15:15
      And so, you know, that's not on this list.
    • 02:15:18
      That's not in these numbers.
    • 02:15:20
      And if you said, hey, the next time you have money potentially for Charlottesville High School roof is is 2031.
    • 02:15:28
      I'm not I'm not sure how that how that works.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:15:34
      Yeah, just a couple caveats here too.
    • 02:15:37
      I just want to highlight, Kevin pointed this out, but I just want to make sure.
    • 02:15:40
      So in the beginning of your question, you talked about adding a column and sort of doing the math.
    • 02:15:48
      That is kind of the other half of this table that we'll show to you in the CIP work session.
    • 02:15:56
      That is exactly what we do.
    • 02:15:58
      But I want to stress, I don't want the takeaway here to be that
    • 02:16:04
      This is where we are right now.
    • 02:16:06
      There are some assumptions that we're making here that make this work.
    • 02:16:11
      And so one of those is, you know, we've built in sort of an anticipated tax increase.
    • 02:16:18
      If you look at the numbers through here, you'll see that the general fund is growing and this is building in.
    • 02:16:24
      What would it take to keep us at the 10%?
    • 02:16:26
      So
    • 02:16:28
      And also, in addition, if you were to see the other side of this table, you would see that to get from 11 to 23, we're not only increasing our tax rate to pay for the debt service, but we're also drawing down the $11 million of debt service fund balance that Kevin talked about.
    • 02:16:47
      So this table is, like Kevin said, a lot of numbers.
    • 02:16:53
      And if you were to look at this table, what we showed you last year, it's
    • 02:16:57
      Some of this has changed and where we hit this has changed because there's a lot of variables in play here.
    • 02:17:04
      But I just I don't want the takeaway to be, oh, well, we can do this.
    • 02:17:08
      We're only at 10 percent.
    • 02:17:10
      I just want you to understand that, you know, this general fund expenditure is incorporating a sizable tax increase and drawing down your debt service fund balance.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:17:22
      And you're going to tell us what that tax increase might be at some point.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:17:27
      Yeah, I mean, I don't think we're ready yet, because one, we've got to finalize the assessment information, but we'll move on to the slides and Kevin is going to talk to you about tax bullet points you were asking about earlier, too.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 02:17:45
      This chart really was put in there to just show the impact of this future debt.
    • 02:17:51
      I mean, the blue bars, historical barring is relatively low.
    • 02:17:58
      The red bars, much higher.
    • 02:18:00
      And one could argue that those are capital costs, that if those numbers would have been higher,
    • 02:18:09
      in the past, then you wouldn't have this spike and bubble in the future, but this is where we are on this.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:18:19
      And I would also just add here, if you look at this graph into your earlier question, you know, when we're borrowing $10 million a year and we're going along and we're able to, you know, we're paying off debt, we're getting new debt, but we're still staying, you know, comfortably below our target.
    • 02:18:38
      And then we get here and just in one bond issue, we push up to our max and
    • 02:18:43
      We don't really have a lot of room when the general fund contracts or something else comes up.
    • 02:18:49
      We're not able to manage our CIP, which we've been able to do before because we've got one sort of large bond issue that's there.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 02:19:03
      And this just illustrates that climb in debt service, the blue being your existing, the red being layered on the top, and the steady climb from the 11 to 23.
    • 02:19:22
      And then this just uses, you know, this is what I was talking about in terms of how do we pay for this.
    • 02:19:29
      We've got the current debt service fund, which is great.
    • 02:19:32
      I mean, that's a nice resource and allows you to spread it out a little bit, utilize some of those funds as you build up increased revenues or decreased expenditures and just using real estate as the tax rate as an example.
    • 02:19:52
      About 13 cents of the 95 cents goes to debt service, another 82 cents towards operation.
    • 02:20:00
      Of course, there's other taxes, all the money goes into one space, but just as an illustrated example of this.
    • 02:20:10
      And then the next slide shows you the value that you were asking for.
    • 02:20:18
      One cent on the real estate we're estimating is about $927,000.
    • 02:20:21
      And so we've got other revenue types on there.
    • 02:20:32
      Meals tax, one penny on that's two and a half, or 1% on that is two and a half million.
    • 02:20:41
      I think Chrissy has looked at this in the past and your meals tax and your lodging tax are kind of competitive with where others are, you know, certainly sensitive revenues and you'd really want to do an analysis on that before increasing that.
    • 02:20:59
      I know meals tax is especially a sensitive issue, but that's one of your larger revenue generators and
    • 02:21:07
      property, personal property tax, you know, instead of one penny, I did 10 pennies there because one penny is 23,000.
    • 02:21:15
      So, you know, 10 pennies gets you 233,000.
    • 02:21:16
      Lodging, 1% is 812.
    • 02:21:16
      Cigarette tax, we understand from the treasurer, couldn't be changed.
    • 02:21:19
      Um,
    • 02:21:31
      without General Assembly approval, I believe, but that's not a ton of money in there.
    • 02:21:39
      But the top item, the real estate tax gives you a pretty good indication of what a penny is worth there.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:22:00
      Kind of the next transition was to talk about the council budget.
    • 02:22:03
      So I want to pause here and just, I know we've talked about a lot.
    • 02:22:08
      Any more questions?
    • 02:22:09
      Anything you want to revisit?
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:22:11
      Could you go back a slide or two that had the red on the top and the back one more?
    • 02:22:17
      Yeah, just one second there.
    • 02:22:28
      So the blue
    • 02:22:30
      is what if we had sort of stayed on the current track where we would end up in terms of debt service?
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 02:22:36
      That's that's your current but that's what you currently have issued the debt service on your what we have on the on the 94 million outstanding.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:22:46
      I see.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 02:22:49
      And so what you're seeing there is it declines.
    • 02:22:54
      Basically, the city has filed the practice of issuing a level principal debt, which means you're paying equal principal installments.
    • 02:23:03
      And so you're just paying interest on your outstanding balance.
    • 02:23:07
      And so that's naturally going to decline a little bit over time.
    • 02:23:12
      and then you have the different years falling off as you go out in the future because we've traditionally issued 20 year bonds.
    • 02:23:23
      And so, you know, some of your debt from 2006 and seven and eight starts falling off.
    • 02:23:31
      You know, obviously why it's increasing, if we were issuing, you know, 10 million a year every year and we had
    • 02:23:42
      basically 10 million issuance rolling off every year, you'd stay flat.
    • 02:23:50
      It's jumping because we go from issuing, you know, eight to 10 million a year to issuing 25 million a year.
    • 02:23:59
      And then with the one big 60 million in the middle of that.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 02:24:07
      Just real quickly to summarize is in terms of how I think about it accurate that interpretation of this is that with our currently proposed CIP budget with a 10 cent or so real estate tax increase and depleting the debt service fund that
    • 02:24:27
      and having cut West Main Street in the parking garage, our current proposed CIP would mean anything in the unfunded list currently, such as PHAs, affordable housing projects, for that matter, Charlottesville High School roof, et cetera, wouldn't even begin to be possible for us to consider funding until 2031.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:24:48
      I would say basically, yes, that's a good summary.
    • SPEAKER_16
    • 02:24:56
      I would agree.
    • 02:24:58
      Very good summary.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 02:25:00
      That's pretty striking and important for, I hope, the community to be aware of.
    • 02:25:05
      I'll just leave it at that.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:25:20
      Any other questions on this section?
    • 02:25:27
      Okay, so now we're going to transition a little bit to talk about council's operating budget.
    • 02:25:35
      So your piece of the pie, you know, this would be just like a department.
    • 02:25:42
      This is your budget.
    • 02:25:44
      And so included in your packet, this is a printout from our financial system.
    • 02:25:51
      This particular screenshot was as of the 21st.
    • 02:25:56
      I don't remember exactly what date I used in the one that was provided to you in your packet.
    • 02:26:01
      But this is a snapshot of your operating budget for the 22 year.
    • 02:26:07
      So included in the original budget for the council, you have a budget of $318,901.
    • 02:26:20
      You can see here there's an itemization of the things that have been spent to date.
    • 02:26:25
      You're roughly about 70% utilized.
    • 02:26:34
      And so here's where you all can make recommendations, move things around.
    • 02:26:41
      I know Kina has consulted with you here on the submission for 23.
    • 02:26:47
      This is how you can track your spending.
    • 02:26:49
      We can provide this to you at any point.
    • 02:26:52
      I don't know what questions you have.
    • 02:26:54
      Kina, I don't know if you had anything you wanted to add here.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 02:26:57
      KINA WISDOM- Nothing to add, but I'm here to answer questions.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:27:09
      There's one question I had, I'm looking at the available budget column, and it shows $92,000 for temporary salaries.
    • 02:27:17
      But that figure doesn't seem to be reflected in the total at the bottom.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:27:33
      So the way this works is the $92,000 plus the $7,000 gives you a total salary and benefits budget of $99,000.
    • 02:27:43
      Then on the other expenses side, you've got a total budget of $219,000 that gets you to the grand total of the $318,901.
    • 02:27:52
      So when you say it's not at the bottom...
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:27:59
      I'm looking in the available budget column.
    • 02:28:02
      I would have thought that the sum of everything above the total expenses, that everything would appear in the total expenses number there under available budget.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:28:19
      So, okay, let me explain how this works.
    • 02:28:22
      So the original budget column, that is what gets adopted.
    • 02:28:25
      That'll be what's in the book.
    • 02:28:27
      That'll be what you vote on finally in April.
    • 02:28:32
      The budget changes column is anything that happens during the year after we adopt a budget.
    • 02:28:38
      So in this case, you'll see that $5,000 and we'll get to that next.
    • 02:28:43
      That's actually the council discretionary funds.
    • 02:28:46
      and then you get to a current budget which gives you what was adopted July 1, anything that happened during the year and then the
    • 02:28:57
      that gives you the current budget.
    • 02:28:59
      Then the purchase requisitions and the purchase orders.
    • 02:29:02
      That's just a purchasing process that Kina and Max go through when you provide them with the bill to pay.
    • 02:29:09
      That's just it's working the bill through the system.
    • 02:29:12
      And then you have the actuals.
    • 02:29:14
      So it's the current budget minus the purchase requisitions, minus the purchase order, minus the actuals give you your available budget.
    • 02:29:24
      So if you were to just not look at the line item details, but look at the bottom line, you had a total budget of 329.
    • 02:29:34
      You've essentially obligated about 233,000 of that, either through purchase orders or things that have already been paid out.
    • 02:29:44
      and you have $94,000 left to spend.
    • 02:29:48
      So if you look at the top with the $92 million in particular, the budget was placed in the temporary salaries line item.
    • 02:29:56
      $92,000.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:29:58
      You made the same mistake I did.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:30:00
      I'm sorry?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:30:02
      You said $92 million.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:30:02
      I'm sorry.
    • 02:30:05
      $1,000.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:30:05
      Yeah, yeah.
    • 02:30:06
      So if you look at that example, that's where the budget is, but you can see that the salaries are hitting...
    • 02:30:16
      in, I don't, there is something weird here.
    • 02:30:18
      Let me, let me do some research.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 02:30:21
      Brian tried to explain it before, but I just, it's the way the system was set up for accounting for council's temporary status, but the funds actually come out of what it looks like as full-time salaries.
    • 02:30:38
      He explained it at the time.
    • 02:30:40
      It seemed to make sense, but Chrissy, if you want to look further into it.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:30:45
      Yeah, it looks like maybe there's also a line missing here because this accrual, it looks like the full-time salaries are on this report.
    • 02:30:52
      So let me provide you with a cleaner copy.
    • 02:30:55
      Thank you.
    • 02:30:56
      I agree.
    • 02:30:57
      Now that you look at these details, there's some math here that's not working.
    • 02:31:01
      It looks like a line is missing.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:31:03
      Well, there's one other, while you're making corrections, if you look at other expenses,
    • 02:31:09
      I would think that original budget plus budget changes should equal current budget, but they're off by roughly $5,000.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:31:14
      Yeah, this whole thing is weird.
    • 02:31:20
      Agreed.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:31:21
      Go tweak it offline.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:31:24
      Yeah, yeah.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 02:31:25
      And this accounts for council only salary, so it does not include the staff.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:31:33
      So temporary salaries is council salaries?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:31:38
      Correct.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:31:39
      Gotcha.
    • 02:31:39
      Okay.
    • 02:31:39
      Correct.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:31:41
      But I think once it goes through payroll, it's posting to full-time, but for whatever reason, this report seems to have some problems.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 02:31:48
      Probably mixed up because we get insurance, the ability to get insurance, while temporary that isn't normally offered to temporary.
    • 02:31:59
      So I'm sure there's been some sort of jiggling in there to offer that.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:32:04
      Well, all of that comes from the payroll system, which it hits in the right place on the actuals.
    • 02:32:10
      It's just probably it looks like we didn't have the budget lined up to the right actuals line items.
    • 02:32:16
      And, you know, council essentially approves a total budget by department.
    • 02:32:23
      And
    • 02:32:25
      even though it's built behind that as sort of the line items you'll see that you know there may be a negative in one line item but there's a positive in another it's so that you're maintaining and the budget control checks are on the budget in total but there's definitely some issue with this report and I apologize for that I should have looked at this more closely instead of just pasting and copying but I'll get you a clean copy that I think would make more sense
    • 02:32:50
      I think the point of popping this up here, though, is this is how your operating budget is allocated in terms of line items and things that you all have discretion to spend money on for council as a whole.
    • 02:33:06
      And so the conversation here was really intended to be more of is this reflective of what you need?
    • 02:33:14
      Is it in the right places?
    • 02:33:18
      Keena, I don't know if you had other questions that you wanted to add to that or not.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 02:33:21
      I did want to note that in the past couple of years, there has not been much traveling for conferences, but this year there seems to be more of an interest.
    • 02:33:33
      So the line item for that may possibly need to be bumped up.
    • 02:33:39
      We do have three people who are intending to attend the NLC conference in March.
    • 02:33:46
      and at least one is expressed interest in the one in the fall.
    • 02:33:49
      So that one tends to cost more.
    • 02:33:52
      So this line item, we have enough and more to cover what's coming up in March, but looking forward, we might wanna look at bumping this one up.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 02:34:04
      Thank you, Keena.
    • 02:34:05
      I was actually gonna bring that up.
    • 02:34:08
      The role on the university's council, I have to go to the one
    • 02:34:15
      in Kansas City in November, as well as one in Atlanta in June.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:34:21
      Because nothing says excitement like Kansas City in November.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 02:34:25
      Okay, ribs.
    • 02:34:28
      And this line item actually used to be, let's see, let me be more specific.
    • 02:34:34
      The non-local travel line item used to be 15,000, but it hadn't been used for years, so we brought it down to 10.
    • 02:34:45
      and so just considering whether to bump that back up.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:34:53
      Is that something that we need to be deciding today or is that just a for future reference kind of thing at this point?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:35:01
      You don't need to decide it today.
    • 02:35:03
      What I'll do is I'll actually give you a report without errors and I'll send that to all of you.
    • 02:35:10
      And then if you can review that and just get back with Keena on any changes you might want to make.
    • 02:35:18
      Let's say if you could, you know, do that definitely before the 14th, but sooner than later would be great.
    • SPEAKER_07
    • 02:35:29
      Okay.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:35:31
      And one other anomaly I want to point out here is this is, this will be the last year you see this, the contribution to civic group that $155,000 payment that is actually the payment to food equity.
    • 02:35:47
      And it was put here because originally it was an off cycle request that went to council that council granted.
    • 02:35:55
      And so the budget, when it was appropriated, the budget got put here and that's where it's paid from.
    • 02:36:00
      We're actually moving that out to its own account code so it'll appear just like every other agency payment.
    • 02:36:06
      It will not be in the council budget.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:36:07
      Okay, thank you.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:36:12
      Okay, so moving on, I do want to talk about the council discretionary funds.
    • 02:36:20
      This was something new that was put in the 22 budget and it was added to the annual budget appropriation.
    • 02:36:28
      It is by requirement defined by a counselor.
    • 02:36:33
      Every counselor has a pot of money.
    • 02:36:36
      So a couple of things here.
    • 02:36:39
      At a minimum, we need to take some action to date.
    • 02:36:45
      No dollars have been spent out of any of these accounts, I believe.
    • 02:36:48
      Is that correct, Keena?
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 02:36:50
      There was one expense for meals.
    • 02:36:54
      Mayor Walker, I can't remember the exact reason she used it, but it was right toward the end that there was one expense, but it was less than $100.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:37:05
      I think there was some group that she had convened that she wanted to pay a lunch for, something like that.
    • 02:37:13
      And I know that when it was circulated to us, none of us had any objections.
    • 02:37:17
      It was like 77, what was it?
    • 02:37:19
      I don't remember what it was.
    • 02:37:21
      It shows up on here someplace.
    • 02:37:23
      The 81, 86.
    • 02:37:24
      8909, 8909.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 02:37:24
      Excuse me.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:37:31
      Yeah, so the way we funded this in 22 was we actually the council strategic account that we talked about earlier, we allocated $5,000 out of that.
    • 02:37:42
      And then from that, each counselor was allocated $1,000.
    • 02:37:45
      So at a minimum, we need to
    • 02:37:51
      bring to council a memo that would reprogram Mayor Walker's account and also Councilor Hill's account to the two new councilors.
    • 02:38:04
      But I guess the broader question here for council is, are these accounts you want to keep and you want to maintain them as part of the budget?
    • 02:38:14
      Is the thousand dollars per councilor still an appropriate amount?
    • 02:38:19
      What are your thoughts on this?
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 02:38:24
      I mean, I personally do feel that this is an equity issue of allowing people to explore various community meetings, to give people that ability to kind of go on the fly a little bit of leeway without having to come forward to the entire body of council.
    • 02:38:53
      and I don't think we really have enough time, enough time has passed to really decide whether or not this is a good way of doing it or not.
    • 02:39:02
      It's only been about, what, six, seven months that we had this going?
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 02:39:08
      Seven.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 02:39:08
      I mean, I personally think we should continue it for at least another year or two to see how we're utilizing it or if something better, if a different plan comes in place.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:39:22
      Dave Kuntz, So I'm just asking, due to not knowing, this is a response to some of the issues that happened with the meal cards or whatever.
    • 02:39:32
      I don't want to drag up the past, but this was sort of a proactive response to that going forward.
    • 02:39:39
      Is that the genesis of this?
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 02:39:43
      Yeah, we didn't have a policy in place that actually stated that we could spend funds on various community events without first getting approval from the entire body of council.
    • 02:39:59
      And this was a way to try to give each counselor that discretionary policy fund.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:40:11
      I would add, for a couple of years, people had been spending money on these categories, but there wasn't a clear line item that it was supposed to be, you know, debited from.
    • 02:40:25
      And so part of our discussion last year was to create this line item so that it would be clear where the money was coming from.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 02:40:36
      Yeah, I think that, you know, we should, you know, keep it as well, but, and maybe this, it's, the information was in the packet that Keena gave me, I just would just like, just clear direction on what it can and can't be used for.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:40:56
      I think some of that comes up in the discussion that we'll have after lunch.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:41:02
      Okay.
    • 02:41:04
      I'm generally in favor of keeping it.
    • 02:41:06
      I think that it gives everyone on council sort of at least an equal starting point relative to constituent outreach or whatever is appropriate to be spent from this.
    • 02:41:23
      So I think we should keep it.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:41:29
      So I mean, that's at least three votes right there.
    • 02:41:34
      I'll tell you, I was opposed to having funds at all, but having decided that we ought to have funds, I think we ought to also then give it a chance to see how it's going to work, because clearly paying money for food and meetings and so on in a time of COVID is not a fair test.
    • 02:41:56
      I think we ought to at least have a fair test before we change.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:42:04
      And so just from a practical standpoint on how these would work, would you envision that this would be the amount and then it would reset every July 1?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:42:15
      I would think so.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 02:42:17
      Okay.
    • 02:42:27
      Any more discussion here?
    • 02:42:28
      Nope.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 02:42:32
      We might need to put someplace in the policy Chrissy that on election years this might have to I mean we'd have to look at resetting it for new counselors coming in and that in the policy what we write in is it resets to 1000 taking the previous counselors
    • 02:42:59
      or 500 or something that take to give them six months taking the previous counselor that they are replacing pot the two.
    • 02:43:12
      Hopefully you get what I'm saying on that.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:43:13
      No, I understand what you're saying.
    • 02:43:14
      I think the only catch point there is we would need to figure out where that was going to come from.
    • 02:43:22
      So, for example, if you if you in your last year, if you spent your entire thousand dollars before January one,
    • 02:43:33
      and we want to reset that for the new counselor where would the $500 or a thousand whatever you decide is the amount where would that come from would that be something that you would allocate from the council operating budget would that be something you would look to the strategic initiatives account to fund because we have to have a funding source for it so yes we can look at that we just need to think that through a little bit I mean personally it seems to come
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 02:44:02
      I mean, the idea of it coming from the strategic initiative account for the reset amount, but the yearly amount should come from the operating budget.
    • 02:44:17
      Okay.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 02:44:19
      I would also add that a new counselor is most likely not going to spend those funds in the first six months.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 02:44:26
      So having it reset in July still would seem reasonable.
    • 02:44:37
      Sounds fine to me.
    • 02:44:38
      I don't know.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:44:41
      Yeah, I don't think we have to decide now.
    • 02:44:43
      I mean, I've made some notes and we'll put together some suggestions and then, you know, based on your conversation later today, if anything changes and certainly you can make changes as we go.
    • 02:44:54
      It's not a ton of money.
    • 02:44:55
      So, you know, I think we can work with that, what you've given us already.
    • SPEAKER_07
    • 02:45:00
      Okay.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:45:04
      All right, we talked about strategic investment account.
    • 02:45:07
      Is there anything else here we need to revisit or moving on?
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:45:11
      I don't recall.
    • 02:45:13
      Did we talk about whether this gets re-up, so to speak, every year or that would just happen?
    • 02:45:21
      We would have to specifically say, yeah, we want to add another $25,000 or something to it.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:45:29
      Yeah, I would say we've done a whole combination of things.
    • 02:45:33
      There is currently not any new money for the strategic investment account included in our base because over the last few years, we have, you know, added dollars from year-end surpluses and those kinds of things.
    • 02:45:49
      So if that is something that council thinks that they would like added to the budget, it would be helpful to know that now so we can build that in.
    • 02:45:55
      Great.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:45:59
      Do you have a sense of how much we've spent sort of annually from this account?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:46:05
      I have a history that I can send you.
    • 02:46:08
      I would say I don't know that an average is really useful because of the things we've used it for.
    • 02:46:16
      You know, it's ebbed and flowed.
    • 02:46:18
      Sometimes we have gotten big things, but I can certainly send you a history for you to review.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:46:25
      Yeah, what was the initial investment?
    • 02:46:27
      I mean, the initial sort of starting point?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:46:32
      I think it was 250.
    • 02:46:34
      I think when it was originally put in, it was started with 250 added to the budget.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:46:40
      As I recall, that was like 2000 or 2002 or something.
    • 02:46:48
      It was a long time ago that it first got started.
    • 02:46:52
      And then it got a significant infusion about three or four years ago that kind of revived the fund.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:47:00
      It did.
    • 02:47:01
      And I know right about the time of the Blue Ribbon Commission, like we put a million dollars in there from year end.
    • 02:47:10
      And so I could pull it up now, but because I'm sharing a screen, I can't get to it.
    • 02:47:15
      But we've got those details.
    • 02:47:17
      I can send it to you.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:47:19
      And you'll see Ms.
    • 02:47:20
      Robertson's point in the chat.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:47:23
      Yeah.
    • 02:47:23
      She asked whether council should consider an official written policy stating the purpose and uses of the SIA.
    • 02:47:30
      I would say definitely yes, because I've been concerned over the last few years that it didn't seem to be regulated at all and people would just sort of get an idea of, hey, I've got something I'd like to spend some money on, what the heck.
    • 02:47:45
      Sometimes it was much more principled than that, but
    • 02:47:49
      It would be very useful to have a written policy that we would all agree on and hopefully follow.
    • 02:47:55
      You don't have to decide that today.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:48:02
      And just to be one point of clarification, when we're talking about SIA here, it's the council strategic investment account and not the CIP SIA account, right?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:48:13
      Strategic investment area referring to Garrett Street and so on.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:48:17
      Yeah.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:48:19
      Got confused for a second myself.
    • 02:48:23
      Okay.
    • 02:48:24
      So we're winding down.
    • 02:48:27
      We've got a lunch recess that we're supposed to come back from at 1230.
    • 02:48:32
      Can we get this last little bit wrapped up by 12 o'clock?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:48:36
      Yes, sir.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:48:37
      Thank you.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:48:38
      Real quick, probably even sooner than that.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:48:40
      Let's rock and roll.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:48:42
      Yep.
    • 02:48:42
      So the last thing I want to just bring up to you is just a few things that we already know going into this budget.
    • 02:48:50
      So these are things that I'm calling, I've coined expenditure drivers.
    • 02:48:56
      These are sort of major
    • 02:48:59
      Increases that we know we've either already committed to or by formula will happen.
    • 02:49:05
      So number one is employee compensation and benefits.
    • 02:49:09
      You granted a mid-year pay increase for employees, which we are all very thankful for.
    • 02:49:15
      That does add to the base of the budget and that will be accounted for, but that will show up as an increase over 22%.
    • 02:49:24
      You know, it continues to be an employee market.
    • 02:49:30
      We hear every day, you know, so and so is doing this and employers are being more creative and doing more things.
    • 02:49:38
      And we continue to keep an eye on our peers in terms of what they're doing.
    • 02:49:45
      And so we'll be talking about that as part of the budget process.
    • 02:49:49
      Additionally, Ms.
    • 02:49:50
      Marshall has talked to you all about the comp study that's underway, and so that will continue to be a driver for the budget, both in 23 and going forward.
    • 02:50:00
      The school's operating budget requests, we know that will be an increase.
    • 02:50:05
      You'll be meeting with them on February 2 for their presentation.
    • 02:50:10
      We are anticipating assessment increases
    • 02:50:13
      and so that formula will increase we also know that you know from the budget last year on their operating side they were they used approximately four and a half million dollars of one-time money to balance their operating budget so that became their base and they've been working really hard to manage that and sort of
    • 02:50:39
      reduce the use of those funds.
    • 02:50:40
      And so Dr. Gurley and team will be talking to you about that, but that will most likely result in an increase in the budget.
    • 02:50:49
      We also made cuts to the budget related to COVID.
    • 02:50:54
      We postponed replacing equipment.
    • 02:50:56
      We postponed dollars that go to facilities repair.
    • 02:51:01
      So as those revenues are starting to climb back up to pre-COVID levels, we also are looking to restore our budget for some of the reductions that we made there.
    • 02:51:14
      We've also talked about changes to the CHAP program and the tax relief program.
    • 02:51:20
      Commissioner Divers has spoken with you all about some of his ideas there.
    • 02:51:27
      And so that will create some increases in the budget.
    • 02:51:33
      and then just department requests in general.
    • 02:51:37
      You know, we're looking through those and there are contractual increases that have happened and other things that will lead to sort of what I'm terming before we actually are able to get to the new requests.
    • 02:51:54
      So very much like the conversation we're having about the CIP, it's a very similar conversation on the general fund side.
    • 02:52:04
      You know, this is not unusual.
    • 02:52:07
      This is where we land every year when we're in this budget process.
    • 02:52:10
      It's where every government lands with their budget process.
    • 02:52:14
      There's always more to more wanted and more needed than resources available.
    • 02:52:23
      And so again, you know, to
    • 02:52:27
      continue that trade-off conversation.
    • 02:52:30
      We'll be working through that to, you know, present to you a proposed budget and when we meet next on the 3rd, we'll talk about, you know, what those revenues look like.
    • 02:52:44
      We'll have much more specifics and we'll be able to tie some numbers to some of these things as well.
    • 02:52:50
      So that's just kind of where we are and I
    • 02:52:54
      Appreciate your time today.
    • 02:52:55
      I appreciate all your questions, really good questions.
    • 02:52:59
      I know we have some takeaways and some things that we owe you, but happy to answer any further questions or any comments.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 02:53:10
      Yeah, I have a question.
    • 02:53:13
      Just wondering, so I think in the terminologies of business type entity,
    • 02:53:20
      So I guess I'd be like the golf course or the utilities or I'm trying to think of other ones that might be considered business type entities within the city.
    • 02:53:32
      How does their budgeting work?
    • 02:53:34
      I mean, I haven't looked through all the relevant documents.
    • 02:53:37
      I haven't I've not looked in closely to the online portal in terms of what you can see.
    • 02:53:48
      but the the sort of high level budget that's in this it's in this thing here I have looked through that and in terms of like the utilities department I I have it so it's a black box I guess in terms of what I can tell
    • 02:54:08
      How does council sort of interact with a business type entity like the utilities department or the golf course for that matter?
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 02:54:21
      Yeah, great question.
    • 02:54:22
      So I'll start with utilities because that's the easiest one.
    • 02:54:29
      That process.
    • 02:54:30
      So first of all, all of those funds go through the same budget process as we've described here.
    • 02:54:38
      They're making their submissions.
    • 02:54:40
      They're being reviewed.
    • 02:54:42
      The difference is
    • 02:54:44
      We spend all of our time talking about balancing the general fund.
    • 02:54:48
      They also have to balance their funds.
    • 02:54:51
      So anything that they contemplate to spend, they have to have offsetting revenues to cover.
    • 02:54:56
      So many times for the utilities, that covers user fees and that's funded by the rates.
    • 02:55:06
      You also have funds like social services and DSS and all those.
    • 02:55:11
      They're covered either through user fees but largely federal and state dollars.
    • 02:55:17
      And so all of and then finally there's a component to that that most of the time there's a transfer from the general fund that helps fund those.
    • 02:55:28
      So in that general fund, you know, in the general fund budget book, you'll see transfer to social services.
    • 02:55:35
      And, you know, it's a big number, but behind that is also a full complement of a social services budget.
    • 02:55:44
      And the general fund contribution is just one piece of that.
    • 02:55:48
      So they do balance that.
    • 02:55:50
      It is in the budget book, but not at a level of detail that we talk about with
    • 02:55:59
      the general fund.
    • 02:56:01
      Utilities, however, they are part of this process and you formally adopt a budget.
    • 02:56:07
      But the largest expense for utilities is the piece that we get from Rivanna.
    • 02:56:14
      And so that does not happen until after we've adopted our budget.
    • 02:56:19
      and so because of that our finance director Chris Cullinan and the utilities director Miss Lauren Hildebrand they actually go through an entire rate setting process and they present that study to you and a recommendation and you actually formally adopt that and it's a very detailed look at all of the budgets for gas water
    • 02:56:45
      wastewater and stormwater.
    • 02:56:47
      And you'll do that in May, early June through a separate process.
    • 02:56:54
      And so you'll be getting a lot of information on that at that time.
    • 02:56:58
      The others that I mentioned, like the golf course, the one that you mentioned, that happens as part of the parks and rec budget.
    • 02:57:06
      And we'll be providing you information and it'll be in the budget book related to that.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 02:57:12
      Thank you.
    • 02:57:20
      Any other questions?
    • 02:57:28
      I got nothing else.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:57:31
      If nobody else has anything, going once, going twice, then I guess we can recess until 1230.
    • 02:57:40
      And thank you so much to Chrissy and to Kevin.
    • 02:57:44
      You all are, I gather, are not needed for the afternoon.
    • 02:57:46
      You can go do something much more interesting.
    • 02:57:50
      We really appreciate your guidance.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 02:57:53
      Thank you.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 02:57:54
      Thanks for your time.
    • 02:57:56
      Thank you all.
    • 02:57:56
      Bye.
    • 02:57:58
      We will come back to this link at 1230 then.
    • 02:58:01
      Is that right?
    • 02:58:04
      Okay.
    • 02:58:04
      See you all at 1230.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 02:58:06
      All right.
    • 02:58:06
      Have a good afternoon.
    • 03:37:14
      Mr. Mayor?
    • 03:37:17
      Yes.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 03:37:18
      Yeah, I was looking for my delivery of mellow mushroom, something like that, lunch, and as part of this retreat, it never showed up.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 03:37:29
      Oh, well.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 03:37:31
      Maybe next time?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 03:37:32
      I guess enforced dieting?
    • 03:37:37
      I don't know.
    • 03:37:40
      Let's see.
    • 03:37:46
      We have all counselors, we've got both of our deputy city managers, we've got city attorney, got Ms.
    • 03:37:58
      Hamill, who I thought wasn't going to be with us after lunch, but if she wants to stick around, she's always welcome.
    • 03:38:08
      Our first item of business
    • 03:38:10
      was with Deputy City Marshal, the Deputy City Manager Marshall and also with Robert Bob with input from Keena Thomas and Lisa Robertson.
    • 03:38:21
      Are we ready to resume or should we wait a minute for Mr. Bob?
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 03:38:26
      Ms.
    • 03:38:26
      Parks, can you please promote the Robert Bob group that's in the, you got it before I could say.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 03:38:32
      Okay.
    • 03:38:34
      So now we've got all of our cast of characters assembled.
    • 03:38:38
      Mr. Bob, welcome.
    • 03:38:42
      You're on mute, but there we go.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 03:38:49
      Good afternoon, and I'm happy to be here.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 03:38:53
      So let's call ourselves back to order.
    • 03:38:56
      The first item on the agenda after lunch is a discussion on council work items entitled Who's on First?
    • 03:39:05
      Discussion led by Deputy City Manager Marshall and Robert Bob.
    • 03:39:11
      Take it away, folks.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 03:39:13
      All right.
    • 03:39:13
      I'm going to share my screen.
    • 03:39:15
      And just to be sure that I share this, I've been sort of poking around, looking at what our community is saying, and they will be very disappointed if council does not do a reenactment of the who's on first sketch.
    • 03:39:27
      It was not part of my plans, but the public demands what they demand.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 03:39:32
      What's on second?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 03:39:33
      I don't know.
    • 03:39:36
      Third base.
    • 03:39:39
      So take it away.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 03:39:41
      All right.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 03:39:43
      I am admitting we're admitting that we're disappointing our public.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 03:39:49
      All right.
    • 03:39:50
      I am trying to share my screen for you all.
    • 03:39:55
      Give me just one moment.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 03:40:02
      All right.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 03:40:10
      Let me know if you all do see the PowerPoint.
    • 03:40:20
      You may not write this second.
    • 03:40:24
      My computer has decided that it does not want to play nicely with technology today.
    • 03:40:33
      And actually, at this point,
    • 03:40:40
      Either Ms.
    • 03:40:41
      Robertson or Mr. Sanders, would you be willing to share?
    • 03:40:44
      My computer would require me to turn off Zoom to reshare.
    • 03:40:51
      And I don't know why it's doing this today, but that's how it's feeling today.
    • 03:40:55
      But I can go ahead and start our discussion.
    • 03:40:59
      For anyone, if you can share, we're gonna start on slide number seven of the deck that I sent last night.
    • 03:41:06
      Again, this particular portion is to provide council with some opportunities to have a discussion about work items.
    • 03:41:14
      And that would include such things as thinking about how you would like your council manager working relationship to go, thinking about staff capacity and council priorities, as well as your strategic plan and timing considerations.
    • 03:41:29
      Please be aware that this really is just an opening discussion.
    • 03:41:34
      You all will have additional opportunities to think about your priority and goal setting when you discuss those collective organizational priorities with the Virginia Institute of Government in February and April 2022.
    • 03:41:53
      So when we think about your opportunities that you have, we know that there is a divide between what work.
    • 03:42:02
      Thank you, Mr. Sanders.
    • 03:42:04
      I'm on about slide nine now.
    • 03:42:08
      We know that you'll have opportunities when you're thinking about how you would like to move forward with your council manager relationship.
    • 03:42:16
      The reason why we bring this up during your retreat is that part of the work you all will be accomplishing in the next six months or so is obtaining a recruiting firm that will match your values and goals for your city manager hire and for what you need in the community, as well as hiring a new city manager.
    • 03:42:32
      So this gives you the opportunity to sort of
    • 03:42:35
      Know exactly where you all would like to go with your relationship to build your priorities in advance and be ready to utilize that individual as soon as they join the organization once you're done with your hiring process and vetting.
    • 03:42:50
      This slide is from the Effective Local Government Manager, which is a textbook that many individuals who will be applying probably have seen.
    • 03:42:58
      It's fairly common in most Masters of Public Administration curriculum.
    • 03:43:03
      I show this because this would be part of the assumption that perhaps any candidate may have about their role versus council's role.
    • 03:43:12
      That doesn't mean that this is necessarily the end-all be-all, but just to give you all an idea of what a
    • 03:43:18
      MPA or MPP trained manager may come in, what their perspective might be.
    • 03:43:23
      So you'll see on the left hand side of that chart, my left at least, it gives illustrated tasks for counsel and the right hand are some illustrated tasks for your executive or administrator.
    • 03:43:34
      And you see that in the middle you have four different blocks, thinking about the mission,
    • 03:43:41
      policy work, administration, and our management work.
    • 03:43:45
      You'll see that clearly more of the management work will go to your executive, but more of the mission work and quite frankly almost half of the policy work really falls into you all's sphere.
    • 03:43:57
      Additionally, on the side are some notes on additional items that again, a city manager candidate may come in thinking of their expectations.
    • 03:44:08
      The part that I'd like to share specifically about those bullets is that is from a document that is in your packet and available to the public.
    • 03:44:15
      It's chapter eight of an ICMA book about council manager relations, and it's made for the manager.
    • 03:44:22
      so what I did was flip them a little bit but keep in mind with ICMA documents again that is a very strong rudder in the profession so again these are ideas that your manager may come in with
    • 03:44:36
      Again, doesn't mean they're right or wrong, but it hopefully my goal is to help you all start to think through what you'd like to see in your next executive.
    • 03:44:45
      Again, that chapter is available to the public in the documents that have been provided.
    • 03:44:50
      And I'm also happy to provide the full book.
    • 03:44:53
      It's an ebook, so no trees were harmed in the making of this PowerPoint.
    • 03:44:58
      Some things just to really keep in mind as you all move forward and this plays into the next part that Deputy City Manager Sanders will be covering with you all and that's really thinking about your priorities and your goals.
    • 03:45:12
      The reason why these are so important is because if those clear expectations are not conveyed to your executive
    • 03:45:20
      They're going to really flounder because they're going to be guessing at what you might need or missing the mark completely.
    • 03:45:26
      That will also be your guide point for creating the work plan for your executive and measuring their future performance is based on that work plan, which is inevitably based on your goals and priorities.
    • 03:45:40
      So when we think through those, again, we've got clear communication as a part because that manager is there to provide you advice.
    • 03:45:46
      The manager has experience and education and expertise in certain topics.
    • 03:45:51
      They're not there ever to tell you what exactly to do, but they are there to provide you with any sort of background guidance, research that you all may need to make some decisions.
    • 03:46:00
      And some of them will certainly be tough decisions.
    • 03:46:02
      Some of them will be very much easier, natural decisions for you all to take command of.
    • 03:46:09
      We also want to think about having support for the implementation of your priorities through that city manager's work plan and allowing your executive to engage in the day-to-day management of both large and small tasks that's within their role.
    • 03:46:21
      Again, this may seem a little rote, sort of silly, but when you think about it again, if you can craft
    • 03:46:30
      that work plan and that thought process then everything that that executive should be accomplishing will be to forward those tasks for you and they should be able to report that to you at any time that you all have questions you know ma'am sir or they if we have someone who is non-binary how are you moving towards this goal and that executive should be able to immediately give you all a redux and a rundown
    • 03:46:54
      which will be very helpful in knowing where you all are on the goals if maybe you can add an additional goal during that calendar year.
    • 03:47:02
      Again that executives there really to make some recommendations on decisions and help formulate your budget that all falls under that big policy block which again is some of those large and small day to day tasks.
    • 03:47:16
      An individual may come in expecting that they will be able to share the good, the bad, and the ugly information with you as again their role is to provide advice to counsel.
    • 03:47:27
      So making sure that you give parameters as to how you all would like to receive that information and how often is something you may want to come prepared for when again you work with your new executive.
    • 03:47:39
      Trust is extremely important.
    • 03:47:41
      Another document that was included in the packet and again is available to the public is a blog post that a individual wrote for ICMA talking about some of the fatal flaws and one of the first flaw really is trust.
    • 03:47:54
      Any individual you hire, you all should feel as if naturally you all can trust them with the stewarding of the organization and the community and vice versa.
    • 03:48:03
      They will need to have that trust to be able to tell you things that may be not only going extremely well, but might be coming up as problematic as an issue.
    • 03:48:13
      And then just a final point that I pulled again from that document that's available in full is thinking of providing the support to your executive as they work towards your stated plans.
    • 03:48:24
      And that's both in public and in private.
    • 03:48:26
      So making sure that the community knows what are your goals and objectives.
    • 03:48:31
      that falls into strategic planning currently your strategic plan again included in those public facing documents was extended through 2021 for very obvious reasons but it's now 2022 so it's probably time for you all to think about how you would like to engage and work towards refreshing updating or completely overhauling whatever you all feel those plans that document is always going to be public facing so it's always going to allow your community to know
    • 03:49:00
      what ideas you all are moving the organization and the community towards.
    • 03:49:05
      It's a really great way to have transparency with the community.
    • 03:49:09
      And then that also allows the community to ask questions for you all.
    • 03:49:13
      How are we doing on goal two?
    • 03:49:16
      How are we moving towards this?
    • 03:49:17
      Or even why is this not a priority for you all?
    • 03:49:20
      That is a very acceptable question for community to ask.
    • 03:49:24
      And
    • 03:49:25
      in your strategic planning process, you all probably have mulled over why something didn't make the cut.
    • 03:49:31
      But again, that support also provides engagement for your executive to know that they're moving in the right direction, to know that they are driving the ship in the way that you all want them to do.
    • 03:49:44
      And if something changes, you get to stop that ship, have that conversation, rework that work plan, and redirect your executive.
    • 03:49:53
      This is your team member.
    • 03:49:54
      This is
    • 03:49:55
      your direct report.
    • 03:49:56
      So please don't feel afraid to utilize them to move towards goals, as well as to do some of the legwork for you all again, giving you all that expertise and advice, having them look at that research.
    • 03:50:09
      I am going to pause for a second before we move forward to see if Mr. Robert Bob would have anything that he may like to add to this particular portion that I may have skipped over.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 03:50:20
      I don't, I don't have anything to add at this point.
    • 03:50:24
      I think the overview is excellent.
    • 03:50:27
      I think they, it has to be, can't just be a one-time discussion with the city council, particularly around the priorities, council manager relationships.
    • 03:50:40
      That's an ongoing discussion.
    • 03:50:43
      You see the manager in action at every city council meeting, but I think at
    • 03:50:50
      Okay, at points, or should I say a toll gate during the course of a fiscal year, there should be an opportunity to re rethink and to reevaluate where we are in terms of the role of city council, the role of the city manager.
    • 03:51:08
      pursuant to the City Council's goals and directives and not wait for those discussions to take place at the time that the City Council conducts its evaluation of the manager.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 03:51:25
      And I'll share that.
    • 03:51:26
      That is very helpful advice from leading organizations myself.
    • 03:51:30
      The more feedback that my board gave me, the better I was able to fulfill our missions, goals, and objectives, as well as the quicker I was able to pivot when needed, when something else came forward that became a priority.
    • 03:51:44
      So I don't, I've never met a manager that doesn't appreciate more communication and conversation than less.
    • 03:51:51
      So please never worry about having those conversations with the individual.
    • 03:51:56
      But do remember that that individual does answer to all five of you.
    • 03:52:01
      So it's also very helpful when those directives or pivot changes come from the body, because it can be very confusing if it comes from one individual.
    • 03:52:11
      Not that that one individual couldn't be speaking for everyone, but make sure your manager knows that or they may be a little paralyzed.
    • 03:52:18
      So moving forward, we're going to have a little bit of a discussion about what your staff being myself, deputy city managers, and your city attorney, Ms.
    • 03:52:28
      Robertson have looked at and determined are some city manager hot topics that again, you all want to consider in your work, but also consider when you all are looking for your next executive.
    • 03:52:42
      So Mr. Sanders, would you like to advance and go ahead?
    • SPEAKER_11
    • 03:52:48
      Good afternoon, everyone.
    • 03:52:50
      And I apologize for being slow in speaking, recovering from my surgery, but wanted to be a part of today's activity.
    • 03:52:59
      So as you've heard from Mr. Bob, and you've heard from Ashley, and I'm chiming in just along in agreement that part of what we need to do right now is to prepare for our incoming interim city manager who arrived on Monday.
    • 03:53:14
      and to help him with being able to step in with a lot.
    • 03:53:19
      There's a lot on the table and the conversation could very easily be overwhelming on day one.
    • 03:53:25
      It is our desire, of course, to not make that, to make it an informative day of laying out various activities and actions and priorities that may be on the table.
    • 03:53:37
      But we know that he comes with great experience along with Mr. Bob's consultation.
    • 03:53:44
      to help even determine how to attack all the various things that will be before him.
    • 03:53:50
      But what we decided to do was to just kind of prepare in advance what we consider to be the hot topics and narrow those down to three, knowing very easily that there are probably 65 hot topic items that need to be discussed right now in the city of Charlottesville, being perfectly honest.
    • 03:54:05
      But when looking at those top three,
    • 03:54:10
      First, of course, the FY23 budget.
    • 03:54:13
      You just spent half of your morning discussing the budget.
    • 03:54:16
      This is priority number one because of where we are in the schedule.
    • 03:54:21
      Making sure that we can get the budget completed on time so that it can be presented to council on the timeline is probably mission critical number one.
    • 03:54:31
      But along that way, we are looking for the opportunity to engage Mr. Rogers in being able to help us look at the process.
    • 03:54:37
      And this would be an opportunity for him to bring his experience to the table and share with us any additional moments that might still be able to be injected into the process to help better inform you all, as well as to allow us to better participate in this process, being our first time as well as the two deputies that are participating.
    • 03:54:58
      And then, of course, the big item is factoring in school reconfiguration.
    • 03:55:03
      How do we evaluate that and make that final determination for its placement in the budget as that process comes to a conclusion?
    • 03:55:11
      So we see that is important.
    • 03:55:13
      That's very critical.
    • 03:55:14
      And we would want to make sure that we can feed him as much information as we possibly can about this process and provide that engagement with staff so that he gains some comfort and familiarity with what our budget looks like today.
    • 03:55:27
      understanding our process as well, and then looking to share whatever feedback he may have from his own experiences that will help us bring that to a natural conclusion in the spring.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 03:55:43
      Before we move on from the budget process, what is the strategy for the citizens to have input
    • 03:55:53
      or the priority that comes from various segments of the community with regard to the budgetary process.
    • 03:56:02
      Are we waiting until the City Council receives the budget and then there is a series of public hearings?
    • 03:56:11
      Sometimes along the way in the budgetary process, there are some priorities that bubbles up from the community that may or may not be
    • 03:56:21
      controversial but critical to the overall public policy process.
    • 03:56:27
      And there are times when the administration A should be aware of those and then B, there may also be opportunities to incorporate some of those critical mission critical issues coming from the community into the budgetary process for recommendation to the City Council.
    • SPEAKER_11
    • 03:56:48
      So there are definitely various steps along the way for public engagement.
    • 03:56:55
      Chrissy, would you like to speak to anything specifically?
    • 03:56:57
      If not, I can continue with an overview of that process.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 03:57:03
      Sure, I can just say that largely the public input on the budget happens once the proposed budget is presented to council in March.
    • 03:57:14
      And so through the series of work sessions that happen with council on that, there is always a time allotted for public engagement on each of those issues.
    • 03:57:24
      Additionally, you know, there have been for a lot of the big issues such as the school reconfiguration we've had numerous both the school board has done numerous public engagements on their own, as well as different work sessions that there has been opportunity for public engagement, but in terms of the specifics of the operating budget for 23 that largely happens in March.
    • SPEAKER_07
    • 03:57:54
      Thank you.
    • SPEAKER_11
    • 03:57:59
      The next priority would be focusing continued focus on the council manager relationship because we believe strongly that that is something that needs to continually have attention paid to it, that it's a building process, that there needs to be some attention focused on providing the assistance to council to consider the qualifications and experience that will help the council select its next city manager.
    • 03:58:24
      And because Mr. Rogers is here in an interim capacity, then this would be your opportunity to have a consultant on the job, taking stock of what our current system is, how it's performing, whether it's performing, and then be able to give you that expert opinion back along the way as you're preparing to select a search firm, put out the various RFP to solicit candidates, and then in your interviewing process, you'll have that feedback.
    • 03:58:53
      We also want to make sure that he has the ability to hopefully modernize the city manager's office.
    • 03:58:59
      And that simply is just to help us make sure that the various changes that have been enacted in the formation of a deputy city manager that's focused on race, equity, diversity and inclusion is fully integrated into the organizational structure that we determine that we do need three deputies or some other configuration.
    • 03:59:19
      that some of our key departments are structured in a way that they are set for success.
    • 03:59:26
      We will have the ability to utilize this relationship with him to help inform us on changes that we need to be made.
    • 03:59:32
      We're not necessarily sure that they will require any policy action, but because certain things that have been implemented have been more priority based from council members, then the consultation with council would probably be required before we would make certain changes.
    • 03:59:46
      And then we want to always make sure that we're trying to present an empowered staff.
    • 03:59:50
      The desire here would be to work with council to ensure that city staff through the city manager can be utilized to provide support and assistance with decision making.
    • 03:59:59
      Our goal would be to make sure that as staff members come before you in council meetings, they come prepared, they come with the information that they need to bring, and they're prepared to answer questions.
    • 04:00:08
      that are all able to help you make the decisions that need to be made.
    • 04:00:12
      Our goal would be to ensure that staff is leading, and that will be the process in doing the work that we need to be doing under the guidance of the city manager.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:00:26
      Nothing is 100%, but we want to make sure that those recommendations or staff support reports, et cetera, of those things are non-apolitical.
    • 04:00:39
      that we stay within the professional recommendations in providing those recommendations and our assessment of different issues to the City Council.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 04:00:54
      And just as a reminder, also in that public facing packet are the ICMA rules of ethics that any executive that comes to you, including your deputies, would certainly abide by.
    • 04:01:05
      So that should be also a helpful guide to know where an executive's brain should be in providing good quality management and service.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:01:13
      And that's an excellent part.
    • 04:01:16
      I know that as a city manager, I kept
    • 04:01:19
      a framed copy of the ICMA code of ethics in my office.
    • 04:01:27
      I think that's a really good point.
    • 04:01:30
      It would also be helpful, and I can say that I have not done this, but now that I'm thinking about it, I think it would be helpful for all administration to administrators to understand or to have some idea of ICMA's code of ethics that relates to the city manager
    • 04:01:49
      And I know that in certain other professions, there are also code of ethics that other professionals within the organization also have to abide and apply, abide by as well.
    • 04:02:00
      The code of ethics is very, very important.
    • SPEAKER_11
    • 04:02:07
      And then the last of the three hot topics for this particular conversation is organizational assessment.
    • 04:02:14
      It is important that we continue to do the work that we've already been doing thus far.
    • 04:02:18
      where we're looking at policies and procedures.
    • 04:02:22
      Ideally, we want to be able to break that down in three and look at what are in need of revision, what are in need of modernization, because there's some of them that are just bold and outdated and don't necessarily apply and they need to be replaced with the new version altogether.
    • 04:02:37
      And then, of course, there are those that are non-existent and should be drafted.
    • 04:02:40
      So there's a lot of work that's already underway, but ideally, before codifying any of those things, we want to be able to utilize the experience of the team that we will have available to us to take a look at those things before implementation.
    • 04:02:54
      We also want to analyze the structure of the organization, taking a look at how do we become more efficient, make sure that we are effective in the work that we're doing, and that we are utilizing best practice throughout.
    • 04:03:08
      Some of the things that we would imagine is that there will be reactions to how we do what we do.
    • 04:03:13
      And I say that candidly because I've had reactions to what I've seen us do and how we do it.
    • 04:03:17
      And I think everyone coming into the job would have the same thing.
    • 04:03:21
      So we're definitely interested and intrigued by the idea that we'll have someone who can immediately react to what it is that they see us doing.
    • 04:03:27
      How are we doing?
    • 04:03:28
      What do they think about what we're doing?
    • 04:03:30
      Some of it could be great validation and others of it could be critical.
    • 04:03:35
      And then, of course, integrating equity everywhere.
    • 04:03:37
      That's just something that we keep using that word across all conversations, internal and external.
    • 04:03:44
      We need to make sure that people understand what it is, and we need to place it appropriately throughout the organization.
    • 04:03:49
      And ideally, with Mr. Rogers' experience in this work, we're very intrigued by the idea that he will bring a perspective to the table that we'll be able to immediately begin to feed upon and use in our ongoing work.
    • 04:04:02
      But I'll also, as I wrap up, saving myself from talking, just say to you that the comments that you have heard from me specifically since I've been here have been focused on, we've got to prioritize, we've got to prioritize.
    • 04:04:17
      One thing that we do not fall short on is prioritizing.
    • 04:04:21
      The problem is we prioritize everything.
    • 04:04:24
      There are too many things at the top of the priority list.
    • 04:04:28
      Therefore, we cannot get anything off that list to the best of our ability.
    • 04:04:34
      And the desire is for us to be able to maybe tier that priority list as what are the hot burning things that we must get done right now because those are more foundational and can be built upon.
    • 04:04:46
      And then we can begin to break down others that fall on that list, not to dismiss anything on the list, but to place them appropriately so that we can attack them
    • 04:04:54
      in a more efficient and effective way.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:04:58
      On the policies and procedures, I would add practices.
    • 04:05:02
      I would add policies, practices, and procedures.
    • 04:05:07
      It's a subtle way, but sometimes we know how the policies and some kind of practices influences the overall procedures.
    • 04:05:20
      If we don't add it, we just need to keep that in the back of our mind that there's policies, practices, and procedures as we move forward in driving change within the organization or in implementing changes as well.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 04:05:40
      And I know that Deputy City Manager Sanders is also saving part of his voice, so I'm happy to
    • 04:05:45
      also answer any questions or dive into anything that council may wish.
    • 04:05:51
      But I do wholeheartedly agree with my colleague.
    • 04:05:55
      We have lots of priorities.
    • 04:05:56
      We don't necessarily have a bookshelf is the way that I frame it to the Home to Hope team is working with individuals who are ready to receive their assistance.
    • 04:06:06
      And for those who are not, we don't forget about them.
    • 04:06:09
      We put them on our bookshelves.
    • 04:06:10
      We call them periodically.
    • 04:06:12
      We check on them.
    • 04:06:13
      but we work with the individuals who need our help and assistance right now and who are ready to receive it and we meet everyone else where they are.
    • 04:06:21
      I know I work more on the people side of our organization and you will hear the people side of the organization consistently say we are trauma-informed and person-centered.
    • 04:06:31
      That means we meet people where they are and who needs what, when.
    • 04:06:35
      I think we also can do that overall in our organization.
    • 04:06:41
      looking at those policies, practices, and procedures within our structure and also our dedication to equity.
    • 04:06:47
      Having a shared definition of equity, I would tell you, is the number one thing that we are lacking.
    • 04:06:52
      In our organization, equity can mean a variety of things that sometimes is all the money and sometimes is a little off.
    • 04:06:58
      It's a little closer to equality than equity.
    • 04:07:01
      So whenever we use that word, we just need to be very careful that we are actually discussing equity and not trying to imply equality
    • 04:07:10
      by using the more acceptable term, which unfortunately in my role, it is part of me to notice this.
    • 04:07:17
      I see that happen quite often and they are very different.
    • 04:07:21
      If anyone needs the little graphic of the people with the rocks and showing it, I'm happy to give it to you.
    • 04:07:29
      They are everywhere though, but what we want to focus in on is equity, which is meeting people where they are, giving individuals what they need and that may not be equal.
    • 04:07:37
      and that's okay.
    • 04:07:39
      And so I really appreciate Deputy Sanders adding that in and having that focus as well.
    • 04:07:46
      But are there any questions, comments or concerns that I can be his part of his voice to as well?
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 04:07:54
      The only other thing that I'd like to add, I'd like to note for City Council that among the materials provided to you today is a
    • 04:08:05
      It's a five or six page document, seven page document called high level focus document.
    • 04:08:14
      And part of what I think we have to do as a city government to move forward is not just listen to all of these things because I don't think any of the materials that are being presented to you or any surprise or anything new to you
    • 04:08:36
      But we have to figure out how to start integrating all of these things into action plans.
    • 04:08:44
      So let's maybe use as an example, the city council has expressed a desire to move forward with collective bargaining.
    • 04:08:57
      And that seems easy enough.
    • 04:09:00
      Let's get an ordinance for collective bargaining.
    • 04:09:03
      But if you go back to the chart that Ashley was referring to that shows sort of the wavy line between policy making and implementation and administration, you'll see that there are all sorts of tasks or actions that are necessary to be accomplished in order to achieve collective bargaining.
    • 04:09:28
      It requires leadership internally.
    • 04:09:31
      It requires city council to evaluate and make certain legislative decisions.
    • 04:09:37
      It requires a consultant possibly to inform city council's actions, but also to assist the city manager in administering a program.
    • 04:09:47
      And probably first and foremost, once you choose to move forward,
    • 04:09:54
      it has to have a very specific priority that's reflected in your budget.
    • 04:09:59
      And as with a lot of things, what we seem to not have been doing as a local government probably more recently is everyone's sitting down together and identify triaging all of the important things you wanna do, setting your priorities for the next
    • 04:10:23
      one to two years, making sure those priorities are very evident in how you apply funding within each of your annual budgets.
    • 04:10:33
      And then making sure that through the city manager's office, when you say I've got funding for one thing, that that thing is actually, that steps are being taken to implement that, whether it's a climate action plan or
    • 04:10:50
      or something else versus different priorities that someone may have.
    • 04:10:56
      And so when you start, if you pick any of the major initiatives that you all would like to see happen and you think about why haven't we made progress on these things, it's our hope that you'll review these materials and the chart that Ashley provided as well as
    • 04:11:19
      sort of these principles of how do we have a relationship where we as a council identify the policies and the programs we want to move forward.
    • 04:11:30
      We prioritize them and we offer money for them.
    • 04:11:33
      Once we do that, there's a shift over to holding someone accountable for making progress on those things.
    • 04:11:43
      And so what we're hoping is that it
    • 04:11:49
      By having all this information and by having Mr. Bob's firm in the interim to help sort through sort of all of the stuff we have in a pile right now that we can all help you over the next few months sort everything, come up with some priorities.
    • 04:12:10
      Hopefully some of those will be reflected in the budget that you come up with, the budget
    • 04:12:19
      can be a very difficult thing because it's a one-year basic expenditure plan, but it has to be informed by a longer range plan because a lot of the things you want to do, even those that are not capital projects, are going to take you multiple years to accomplish.
    • 04:12:35
      So you always have to have your business plan or your strategic plan, whatever you want to call it, but both the person you hire and that person's qualifications
    • 04:12:49
      will be key to getting things done.
    • 04:12:51
      The staff that you have and their capabilities will be key to getting things done.
    • 04:12:56
      And then how you apply money to the whole situation will determine how well and how quickly things get done.
    • 04:13:04
      So we really hope that all of this information is helpful to you.
    • 04:13:09
      We really hope that having Mr. Bob's group
    • 04:13:16
      as an expert consultant over the next few months will help you do some of this sorting.
    • 04:13:22
      And with that, I'll just be quiet, but we just we wanted to make sure that you saw this high level focus document so that you can see, you know, there's seven pages of major things that you want to do and all of them relate to one another.
    • 04:13:39
      All of them involve budget and leadership issues.
    • 04:13:43
      All of them involve organizational structure issues.
    • 04:13:46
      And so somehow we've got to start helping you do the jobs you were elected to do and figure out how to put all something into action in a way that you can be proud of.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 04:14:00
      So Lisa and Ashley and Sam, hey, I get it.
    • 04:14:04
      We need to prioritize you.
    • 04:14:08
      I got the message.
    • 04:14:10
      So my question is like when we're hiring like a superintendent there has to be that those candidates they have to have a certain you know
    • 04:14:27
      qualifications that they have to get certified by the city, you know, it's a long list of things.
    • 04:14:34
      Is there anything similar for city managers, like must they have a master's in public administration or must they pass some type of, I don't know if there's anything equivalent to being a city manager.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 04:14:47
      Yes, sir, there are.
    • 04:14:48
      Mr. Bob will take it, but just know, yes.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:14:54
      Yes, they have, I would think a minimum requirement would be either a master's in public administration, an MBA, some city managers have, you know, a raw degrees as well.
    • 04:15:08
      But I think the experience of having been a city manager in particular in an urban community, in addition to those so-called would be, you know, part of the recruitment process that we would work with you on.
    • 04:15:24
      Also, there is the ISTMA does have a certification program for city managers as well.
    • 04:15:30
      And there's a number of city managers that goes through the ISTMA certification process.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 04:15:36
      So, I understand that, but, you know, and it sounds like that's an option with this, like, and again, I'm still kind of going back, it hasn't been a month yet since I've been on the school board, it's like, we, a superintendent, they have to have these, you know, qualifications, they have to be certified by the, you know,
    • 04:16:01
      There's certain guidelines that the State Board of Education say you have to meet.
    • 04:16:04
      And what I'd like to know is that anything similar to
    • 04:16:09
      being a city manager or you, you know, you as a city body, you want to have someone with this background and things.
    • 04:16:16
      So I hope I'm making myself clear.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:16:19
      Absolutely you are.
    • 04:16:19
      I can say that, you know, having been on both sides, on the education side as well, there is no such thing for a city manager at all.
    • 04:16:29
      I think the superintendent process is a little bit more from a certification.
    • 04:16:33
      standpoint, a little bit more rigorous, but I think the experience of having served as a city manager in urban communities or in communities very similar to your community.
    • 04:16:42
      I know in some places, when hiring a city manager, one of the city councils have looked at, have you been a city manager in a particular state?
    • 04:16:55
      Sometimes state councilors are hesitant to hire someone from
    • 04:17:01
      Let's say Wyoming, I don't want to pick on the state of Wyoming to be a city manager, let's say in Richmond, for example.
    • 04:17:10
      But it all depends on the trail that he or she have taken along the way professionally to be, you know, to rise or to be competitive in that process.
    • 04:17:22
      But I would say at a minimum of an MBA, some postgraduate degree,
    • 04:17:30
      along with the experience.
    • 04:17:33
      And there are certain managers in smaller cities, city councilors are hesitant to hire a city manager that comes from a larger urban city.
    • 04:17:44
      There are times when, you know, some are hesitant to hire a city manager whose experience has only been in a suburban community to come into a more urban community.
    • 04:17:55
      So there are a number of nuances.
    • 04:17:58
      when we go through that process.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 04:18:01
      So, Mr. Bobby, if Juan or Ashley or Sam is a city manager position, a political position, how would you respond?
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:18:11
      I would say
    • 04:18:14
      Excuse my Creole Councilors.
    • 04:18:16
      Hell no.
    • 04:18:16
      No, we don't want a city manager.
    • 04:18:18
      We want a city manager to stay, you know, understand the political dynamics of the environment, excuse me, in which they operate and will be managing.
    • 04:18:29
      Stay out of the politics.
    • 04:18:31
      Do not have a conversation with one city councilor with regard to one thing and then another city councilor with regard to others.
    • 04:18:39
      And it's a hard thing to, you know, not
    • 04:18:43
      have a city manager who then comes in and have alliances to the counselor from this area versus being a manager for all of the all members of the city council.
    • 04:18:53
      And so, you know, it's one of those conversations when we go through that process, have to have a hard discussion with whomever it is that you're going to employ to be your next city manager.
    • 04:19:06
      Stay out of politics.
    • 04:19:08
      Understand the political environment in which he or she worked in.
    • 04:19:11
      but they're there to be apolitical.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 04:19:16
      Vice Mayor Wade, your city manager is Switzerland.
    • 04:19:21
      They're there, they listen, but their job is to advise and to manage.
    • 04:19:26
      As far as credentials, just to give you an example, both your deputy city managers has master's in public administration and I have a law degree.
    • 04:19:34
      Again, that's very common in the field.
    • 04:19:36
      In Virginia, some localities do look favorably on individuals that have
    • 04:19:42
      have obtained, for example, the local government certificate from Virginia Tech Center for Public Administration and Policy or other such certificates or credentials.
    • 04:19:51
      But nothing is required.
    • 04:19:53
      But there are some, I'm going to call them add-ons, that many individuals who are interested in city management or city government will obtain.
    • 04:20:03
      I know, for example, that Ms.
    • 04:20:05
      Hamill works very closely with GFOA.
    • 04:20:07
      So any work with GFOA when you're looking at a budget individual is highly favored, but none of it is required.
    • 04:20:14
      She does that because part of how she keeps up her credentials.
    • 04:20:18
      But there are some certificates that you can look for.
    • 04:20:21
      I would tell you that in a city that runs as ours, Mr. Bob, correct me if I'm wrong, it would be unusual to hire someone that doesn't have an MBA, MPA or MPP.
    • 04:20:31
      It'd be a little weird.
    • 04:20:33
      Not that you can't, but it would be unusual to do that.
    • 04:20:40
      As far as the field the person comes from, again, that's kind of up to the organization.
    • 04:20:47
      from my experience in various localities in the Commonwealth, typically the city manager has been a professional manager.
    • 04:20:53
      Perhaps they come from budgeting, perhaps they come from community development or housing work, but most often individuals who are in local government or city government have sort of planned their life that way and have a lot of experience.
    • 04:21:08
      Some may come from non-profit work, which again is still working with the community and gives them a different perspective, but
    • 04:21:15
      We're all kind of, for lack of a better word, samey, but that is not a bad thing, in my opinion, for your manager.
    • 04:21:21
      That means that, again, with those ICMA rules of ethics, all of us are aware of them.
    • 04:21:26
      We've implemented them into our lives.
    • 04:21:28
      With those of us with MPAs, even though I worked in a nonprofit area, I still carried those ethics as to how I did my work at that particular time.
    • 04:21:35
      And same when I worked for state government.
    • 04:21:37
      I carried those ethics because they were drilled into me, and I appreciate them.
    • 04:21:42
      I know that's not giving you as concrete of an answer as what we would look for in a superintendent but just some hallmarkers that a lot of people may check if they're looking at a resume.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:21:52
      And the other thing too you might want to look at sometimes during the process the municipality will look at what are the critical issues facing our city and then they would guide their decision to employ someone who has a
    • 04:22:07
      have very specific experience in having dealt with those particular issues.
    • 04:22:13
      Many years ago, to become a city manager, you had to have an engineering degree because many of the cities were going through certain, you know, issues regarding water and sewers and public works types of issues.
    • 04:22:26
      But our role in the profession, our role have changed pretty dramatically over the years.
    • 04:22:34
      I'm convinced that you're going to get a strong pool of candidates when you go through this process.
    • 04:22:42
      I'd be totally surprised if that doesn't happen.
    • SPEAKER_11
    • 04:22:45
      And I would add that you can't do the job without being aware that politics are all around you.
    • 04:22:51
      We understand it is not our job and responsibility to play politics.
    • 04:22:55
      We are here to do the job to implement policy and to be responsible stewards of the people's money.
    • 04:23:01
      So in doing that work, we have to be conscious of what's going on around us and make sure that those voices that don't get heard get to that table as well.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:23:11
      Yeah, so I want to pivot just a little bit to the presentation from the city attorney.
    • 04:23:19
      One of the things that
    • 04:23:22
      of Virginia Municipalities are facing.
    • 04:23:24
      I believe it's going to be just so sea change with respect to collective bargaining and the extent to which opportunities are presented for the city staff to advisor that's a manager level and other city attorneys level, et cetera, on the collective bargaining process.
    • 04:23:46
      I think that's going to be important.
    • 04:23:47
      I think also be important for city councilors
    • 04:23:51
      If there were seminars on collective bargaining with regard to, you know, National League of Cities or the Municipal League, I think it would be important for counselors to also, you know, gain that orientation as well.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 04:24:07
      I have two sort of thoughts this conversation brought to mind is one is one of the things I find hard is
    • 04:24:20
      There's obviously areas where the boundary between policy and operations is super clear.
    • 04:24:24
      You can point to examples where it's been stepped over the bounds and that's clear, but how do we set expectations for it?
    • 04:24:33
      Because it just seems like there's still a lot of gray areas.
    • 04:24:35
      Sticking with the issue of collective bargaining,
    • 04:24:42
      There's the ordinance, but then as you were discussing, there's a question of what are the operational investments and decisions we need to do to make that actually happen in practice, and then how we prioritize that in our budget process and
    • 04:24:57
      That may not be the best example, but even there, there's some sort of gray areas and overlap for our work.
    • 04:25:02
      And just how do we set expectations and good communication about how we navigate the gray areas?
    • 04:25:08
      Because those are the things I find the most difficult.
    • 04:25:11
      Or another, a really good example is, you know, every year are like CAF allocations or allocations related to affordable housing.
    • 04:25:19
      Like it's operations, but it's also a lot of policy.
    • 04:25:25
      That's the first thing, I guess, but
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:25:30
      Council, that is a really important question, and I want to try to respond to it on a specific, but the success from the administration to the political community, I mean, the city council, is how do we work and gain success and identify those gray areas?
    • 04:25:55
      That's where we spend.
    • 04:25:56
      That's where we have to spend our time, effort and attention and working and building that strong partnership.
    • 04:26:03
      And I'm really glad you mentioned that because it's in one of my notes here.
    • 04:26:09
      I don't have any specifics, but where there are gray areas where which is where it's not clearly defined between policy and administration.
    • 04:26:19
      That's where we have to spend our time and build our partnership and relationship around
    • 04:26:26
      working inside those areas that are gray and then try to come out with some sunlight.
    • 04:26:33
      But I'm really glad that you mentioned that because we have to identify where those gray areas are.
    • 04:26:39
      And that's where we really need to spend our time, effort, and attention into those gray areas, however they are defined.
    • 04:26:45
      And I can't define them because I'm not in Charlottesville.
    • 04:26:50
      But I would say that the point that you made is really important.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 04:26:56
      Yeah, and I guess on council's end, it feels like, at least in the time I've been on council, again, on council's end, we haven't sort of had enough communication about what the boundaries and expectations are exactly.
    • 04:27:10
      So it's never clear, ever.
    • 04:27:13
      And the second thing that came to mind about prioritization is, one of the things I find difficult is
    • 04:27:22
      A lot of the things are unknown to me in terms of like, okay, I could pick policies to prioritize, but every policy we're looking at, like, how do we know on council's end what it would mean in reality to turn it into reality in terms of the budget allocation necessary and maybe more importantly,
    • 04:27:44
      the staff resources needed, whether that be new positions or deferred departmental requests, because to me, that's like critical to figuring out how I would prioritize things and just sort of how do we systemize that.
    • 04:27:57
      So council is just always has a clear sense of, you know, we want to see XYZ happen or the community is saying XYZ.
    • 04:28:06
      And we know, well, it's going to require this allocation, this many staff resources.
    • 04:28:11
      So we know, okay, do we want to put on the back burner plan for it?
    • 04:28:15
      Do we need to go tell the community, like, this just isn't possible?
    • 04:28:20
      Collective bargaining, I feel like, is a good example.
    • 04:28:22
      There's the ordinance, which to me seems easy, clear to get done.
    • 04:28:27
      But then there's also the other question that has been raised in terms about, like, the position of HR.
    • 04:28:33
      director, which is vacant, the need for a new staff position, which would handle negotiations across departments, the need to look at wage, employment status issues, et cetera, just all that.
    • 04:28:48
      And we don't see that at first, but that's really the most difficult thing.
    • 04:28:52
      I don't know if that makes sense, but...
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:28:57
      I can say that having been all my career, but for the time that I would then continue having to deal with some of the most toughest, I don't know if that's the right word, but
    • 04:29:12
      some of the most brilliant public labor negotiators who were very skilled at representing various unions, whether it was the Amalgamated Transit Union, whether it was police and fire, whether it was AFSCME or some of the others.
    • 04:29:31
      And my experience is that the collective bargaining units are very skilled.
    • 04:29:41
      and smart and strategic and funded because other than one of the big difference between the collective bargaining units and this municipality is that the municipality stands alone, whereas bargaining units have
    • 04:30:02
      You know, mega memberships, whether it's the FOP, whether it's the Amalgamated Transit Union, they have very skilled individuals that work on their behalf.
    • 04:30:15
      And so, like I stated earlier, it's going to be a big sea change, I think, for, you know, not just for the city of Charlottesville, but I think for other municipalities than the Commonwealth that haven't been through this process before.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 04:30:28
      And I think as well,
    • 04:30:32
      It's a reasonable expectation for city council as a whole, particularly when you're being told that a keystone of the council manager relationship is having a professional city manager who's trained in the work that they're doing.
    • 04:30:48
      It's a reasonable expectation for you all to say, we're interested in exploring this new initiative.
    • 04:30:58
      We need to work together.
    • 04:30:59
      Here's the basic parameters that
    • 04:31:01
      we think would be good to implement.
    • 04:31:04
      And that person has to come back to you and put some meat on those bones for you.
    • 04:31:10
      That's why you have a city manager with these qualifications.
    • 04:31:15
      That person should be able to come back and give you an outline, give you some cost estimates, and then working together in that gray area, you figure out
    • 04:31:28
      Do we have money to do this?
    • 04:31:30
      Do we want to prioritize it and put it in this year's budget?
    • 04:31:33
      You know, all of those things.
    • 04:31:35
      But for major initiatives, how to define that gray area and who's a part of that and how you get the information that you all need, that's all part and parcel of that relationship.
    • 04:31:49
      But it's absolutely appropriate for you all to say, we really want to do this, but we haven't gotten the information we need
    • 04:31:57
      to be able to do our part.
    • 04:32:00
      How are we going to get that?
    • 04:32:02
      When are we going to get that?
    • 04:32:03
      Is that through you, city manager's office, or is that through a consultant?
    • 04:32:07
      And it's a working relationship, but it may be a little bit different depending on which big issue you're working on.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 04:32:17
      That also plays into the trust that was mentioned as part of that ICMA document that I provided for you all.
    • 04:32:26
      You also need to select an executive who you trust, what they're going to tell you.
    • 04:32:31
      And so your executive either A, knows the answer or B, if they don't know the answer, they will tell you.
    • 04:32:37
      So, for example, with collective bargaining, anyone who's been in local government in the Commonwealth of Virginia is at a distinct disadvantage than other localities.
    • 04:32:46
      That being said, as soon as you all started talking about it, I bought a book.
    • 04:32:50
      That's part of my job.
    • 04:32:51
      My job is to make sure that I'm as educated as possible to provide you all with as much data as the person can.
    • 04:32:59
      That trust also comes into play because the data that gets provided may not exactly be the data that
    • 04:33:04
      We were hoping for.
    • 04:33:05
      It may be something more complicated or more difficult, but that is what you want your executive to feel comfortable and confident telling you so that you all can make the best policy decisions that you can based on the information that's available.
    • 04:33:19
      Like the bargaining is a hard one because it's a little bit of wild, wild west here in Virginia as to what it's going to look like and how it's going to feel.
    • 04:33:25
      But there are many other topics where it is another city manager, for example, is a phone call away.
    • 04:33:32
      if they don't know the answer or perhaps they already do have experience and they will start a sentence maybe along the lines of my experience says that doesn't mean it's how it's going to turn out but that's what you want your executive remember that top part was that they advise you on policy that's what you really want to be able to feel like you can lean in and if you don't get that feeling when you're looking at a candidate that you would be able to lean into that person and trust them they're not the right person.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 04:33:58
      Yeah, and I guess just my final thought real quickly that this conversation brought to mind is just definitely by far I find the most frustrating thing is when, and I think in huge part it's caused by, you know, the level of turnover combined with council not having a strategic plan, but it's just when, you know, we have a majority of council indicate they're interested in something and
    • 04:34:23
      It doesn't happen or we don't at least we don't know if there's momentum and are the communities demanding something and we just don't know like
    • 04:34:35
      What specifically is needed to make it happen, the timeline, what to tell people about what we need to do to get from point A to point B. And so it just feels like something's in the lurch and the community that's demanding something doesn't know what the answer is or why that's the case.
    • 04:34:51
      We don't really know what to tell them.
    • 04:34:53
      And we're not sure when or from who we may get an answer.
    • 04:34:57
      And again, I think the critical thing there is the lack of a strategic plan and the level of turnover just puts us in that situation, unfortunately.
    • 04:35:04
      But
    • 04:35:05
      This conversation brought that to mind is that that is by far the thing I find the hardest.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:35:11
      I think I would say that once the council, you want to set a policy directive on a particular issue, it's up to the staff to say, okay, this is where the council wants to go to the resources that are required to get where you want to go.
    • 04:35:31
      and council have to provide those resources.
    • 04:35:32
      Now, once council provides those resources, then it's up to the council to hold the administration's feet to the flame, as it were, to ensure that the program and the policies are executed and that the community is involved.
    • 04:35:48
      And there is progress along the way.
    • 04:35:50
      So it's not those one-hand clapping.
    • 04:35:53
      Once the council approves, gives us directive, it's up to the administration to
    • 04:36:00
      You know, to implement those.
    • 04:36:02
      But the administration also have to say, Counselor, this is where you want to go.
    • 04:36:05
      This is the resources that's going to be required to get you there.
    • 04:36:09
      And you have to provide those resources.
    • 04:36:12
      Or if you don't provide the full resources, then the administration will say, we can't get you all the way there, but here's where we can get you.
    • 04:36:20
      So that's part of that real hard conversation that really does have to take place.
    • 04:36:24
      And it's not appropriate.
    • 04:36:26
      situation.
    • 04:36:27
      There will be bumps and bruises along the way, but that's where we, you know, back to that gray area, but also back to the accountability area as well.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 04:36:44
      Yeah, and I think there's also the day-to-day challenge of balancing all of the stuff that comes in through MySeaVille or email and
    • 04:36:53
      just responding to all of those things on a daily basis.
    • 04:36:57
      And each of you individually gets those things.
    • 04:37:00
      And so that sometimes each of you individually needs help responding to them.
    • 04:37:07
      The city manager's office gets those things as well.
    • 04:37:10
      And so having the right blend of prioritized action plans
    • 04:37:19
      with a competent staff that can take some of that pressure off the city manager.
    • 04:37:26
      So there's a combination at any given time of people focused on your major initiatives, but also focused on being responsive to emergent community needs and especially needs for information.
    • 04:37:43
      A blend of that is really necessary, but again,
    • 04:37:50
      it comes back to you all being able to communicate clearly sort of what your desired combination of those things is and everybody working together to cover all of the needs for responsiveness.
    • 04:38:08
      And I think as well, one of the issues in the high level focus document is also you're having a discussion of
    • 04:38:17
      not just what you need in a city manager, but what do you need in a communications office?
    • 04:38:22
      Do you all need a spokesperson?
    • 04:38:24
      How many people do you need there?
    • 04:38:26
      How are you going to make plans for community engagement on an ongoing basis?
    • 04:38:35
      So there's a lot of, you know, it's like a coloring book that has a lot of lines, but we've got to
    • 04:38:45
      Got to fill in the colors and get the picture filled in.
    • 04:38:51
      And so there are a lot of moving parts.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:38:55
      Speaking of the moving parts, I don't know if this is the case in Charlottesville, but I've seen it in municipalities that I've managed, and that is being able to respond to, I've seen a system, at least in two cities, because of issues, get clogged up.
    • 04:39:14
      with regard to responding to four-year requests or in case of California, the Bronze Age requests and being able to respond to those within whatever the legal requirements are.
    • 04:39:27
      And so I've seen, you know, just an avalanche in public community, the four-year requests.
    • 04:39:36
      And I'm not suggesting that those are good and sufficient requests,
    • 04:39:42
      is just that from an administration standpoint, they tend to clog the system up in terms of its ability to respond appropriately and in a timely manner.
    • 04:39:52
      And that becomes a major resource issue as well.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 04:39:59
      I'd like to say that the
    • 04:40:02
      at this point, just a couple of the 221 meetings that we've had with the deputy city managers that I participated in have been very helpful and informative.
    • 04:40:12
      And I think I look forward to this going forward as kind of a way to bridge between meetings and sort of keep track of initiatives or things that I'm hearing about concerns like the Fifth Street situation there and
    • 04:40:31
      It seems like it's a good kind of mechanism to just kind of keep continuity between weeks.
    • 04:40:37
      And I'm grateful for that.
    • 04:40:39
      And I also said that the high level document that you all put together, I haven't had a chance to go through it in detail, but it seems to be a good summary of crystallization of the things that the city wants us to focus on.
    • 04:40:52
      And so I appreciate you all taking a stab at that.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:41:00
      Well, eventually what we want to do is, you know, once we have a permanent person on board, we want to be able to have some continuity at the deputy city manager's level, at the city manager's level, at the department level.
    • 04:41:17
      You know, we have a number of vacant positions that we, you know, we have to fill those critical positions.
    • 04:41:24
      And I just, you know,
    • 04:41:27
      left a session with another city this morning, and one of my theme there is that, you know, to create real organizational change, the HR function becomes supersonically important because, you know, that's an interdependent agency and a profession
    • 04:41:49
      that really helps to create a high-performing organization in terms of talent management and in all of those other legal requirements that comes out of HR.
    • 04:42:02
      So I know that we have a number of vacant positions, but we really have to move as quickly as possible to hire someone with the skill level that the city requires
    • 04:42:19
      in that position.
    • 04:42:20
      It's not to say that the other vacancies aren't important.
    • 04:42:22
      Clearly, they are important as well.
    • 04:42:25
      But I just think that to create a high-performing organization, it really starts with our ability to recruit and retain tech talent.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 04:42:46
      Anybody else have any questions?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 04:42:49
      I'd just like to ask Ms.
    • 04:42:50
      Thomas, since she's designated here as someone who may be participating as requested, do you have any thoughts on any of this that you've been just itching for a chance to tell us?
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 04:43:09
      I just agree with everything that has been said.
    • 04:43:11
      A thought did pop up that when you do start thinking about new initiatives, just
    • 04:43:19
      Also consider that you may need to give something up in order to make something else happen.
    • 04:43:24
      Just consider what's already on the table.
    • 04:43:26
      And, you know, prioritizing is just going to be, I think, paramount with the strategic plan that will guide you as far as even coming up with new initiatives and whether it's worth doing those now or prioritizing those for years to come.
    • 04:43:42
      So just considering what's already on the table before deciding to implement something new.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 04:43:49
      And to sort of respond a little bit there, I would hope that you and the deputy city managers and whoever all else be the right people here would remind us from time to time if we are putting an unreasonable burden on you.
    • 04:44:07
      We have a tendency to have great ideas that we want everybody to go forth and do something without recognizing that there are a limited number of hours in the day.
    • 04:44:19
      and I hope that you will feel empowered to say, whoa, stop, too much.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 04:44:26
      Thank you.
    • 04:44:28
      I'm really thinking right now about our communications.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 04:44:33
      I just want to say I definitely want to be around when what the mayor just said is absolutely carried out in 100%.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 04:44:42
      Right.
    • 04:44:43
      I'm thinking right now of our communications department that just today alone has been split in so many different directions.
    • 04:44:50
      trying to support various meetings simultaneously.
    • 04:44:55
      So there are some of those things that we don't always see, but people are working behind the scenes frantically trying to make it happen.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 04:45:04
      Well, and one of the issues that I know we've grappled with over the last couple of years is trying to figure out what the capacity is of the communications office for just how many Zoom meetings can we ask
    • 04:45:20
      the office to handle in any particular week.
    • 04:45:24
      The citizenry wants to be having all kinds of meetings and having task forces and doing this and doing that.
    • 04:45:33
      And there was certainly a time for the first year or so when we had to say, no, stop, we can't have more meetings.
    • 04:45:40
      We just don't have the staff for that.
    • 04:45:43
      So that's gonna be a discussion that we're gonna have to work on on an ongoing basis.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 04:45:54
      I just want to bring up.
    • 04:45:54
      Other than that, I don't have anything.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 04:45:56
      Okay, thank you.
    • 04:45:58
      I just wanted to bring up kind of in about the communications.
    • 04:46:01
      I do want to remind people that talking to communication staff in the past, hybrid meeting solutions are the most intensive of staff time.
    • 04:46:13
      It's almost exponentially more intensive on their time.
    • 04:46:18
      And just to be aware of that as we are looking at returning from COVID and
    • 04:46:25
      that we're down about 50% of our department in communications right now.
    • 04:46:32
      And hybrid meetings do take a lot more effort on their part.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 04:46:40
      Well, I would add that it's not only in personnel down 50%, it's the workload, because those positions that are missing were higher level positions, so that increased the workload for the others.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 04:46:58
      I'm just curious, has the communications position or positions been advertised?
    • 04:47:04
      Are those in process?
    • 04:47:05
      Are we waiting for a new city manager?
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 04:47:09
      No, sir.
    • 04:47:09
      I went ahead and moved forward with obtaining, pushing those out.
    • 04:47:15
      So the director of communications and public engagement, which you notice it does have a changed topic to address some of the concerns that I've heard.
    • 04:47:23
      as well as an updated job description.
    • 04:47:25
      That closed on Friday and I am reviewing their submissions currently.
    • 04:47:31
      I will also utilize our excellent team that is in communications to help me make sure that I'm not missing a very good candidate and then we will move forward with the interview process.
    • 04:47:44
      That same thing is occurring with the Director of Human Services and the Director of Human Resources.
    • 04:47:50
      So please know all of those have been published
    • 04:47:53
      Human Services and Communications have closed.
    • 04:47:56
      We are advertising human resources as a continuous advertisement.
    • 04:48:01
      So I've actually just recently asked our HR team to provide me with the applications we have in thus far, but that gives me the flexibility to start looking at applications and not wait for a close date.
    • 04:48:12
      and also the opportunity for anyone who may hear today and want to apply to still be able to do so.
    • 04:48:17
      So all of those are going through and I believe if the director of IT has not been dropped yet, it will be dropped shortly.
    • 04:48:24
      So by a short clip
    • 04:48:27
      all of those interims and vacancies will be taken care of generally with a few stragglers being your city manager, your chief of police, and at this time the office of equity because there's no ongoing funding for it.
    • 04:48:41
      So that will remain vacant for an undefined amount of time.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 04:48:45
      Thank you.
    • 04:48:51
      So does that...
    • 04:48:53
      So I'm looking at the things we're supposed to be talking about here.
    • 04:48:58
      We've talked about the council manager working relationship.
    • 04:49:01
      We have talked about the need for council priorities and updated strategic plan.
    • 04:49:08
      We've talked kind of here about city staff capacity, though I didn't specifically ask for comments about that.
    • 04:49:15
      If anybody wants to talk more about that, let's let's talk timeline considerations.
    • 04:49:22
      Ms.
    • 04:49:23
      Marshall just gave us some timeline as far as who's getting hired and what that process looks like.
    • 04:49:29
      But we haven't talked about what a timeline might look like for council work items.
    • 04:49:37
      And I'm wondering, those of you who drafted the agenda, what did you have in mind for this topic of discussion?
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 04:49:47
      I think when we were thinking of timelines, it was inclusive of both topics that you mentioned, thinking about the timeline of creating your priorities, because oftentimes they do have impacts or unintended impacts within our budget.
    • 04:50:02
      Consideration that if those decisions are made after a budget is drafted and approved, that that may mean that that particular priority needs to
    • 04:50:11
      sit on our proverbial bookshelf for a minute because there just wasn't an allocation for it.
    • 04:50:17
      And also thinking about those timeline considerations as you all prioritize.
    • 04:50:21
      So for example, if you all realize that wanting I'm going to use something silly purposefully to paint the city hall purple will take more resources than you're willing to give because you also want to have free ice cream day every month.
    • 04:50:36
      That's a timeline consideration for you all as to how you think about your goals, objectives, and priorities.
    • 04:50:41
      And I purposely gave something silly and nonsensical, not to pick on any other priority, but that is part of the considerations.
    • 04:50:49
      And then with boards and commissions, I think you all actually just inadvertently through Mrs. Thomas has hit on that.
    • 04:50:55
      How many boards and commissions can individual support?
    • 04:50:57
      How many do you need?
    • 04:50:58
      How many can actually be staffed to their fullest?
    • 04:51:01
      And also I would add in, because I'm always honest with you all,
    • 04:51:06
      Is that something that actually the expertise and experience of your staff can help guide with then future input from our community?
    • 04:51:12
      Do you need another task force for it or are you not potentially utilizing the expertise you have already on retainer?
    • 04:51:20
      within City Hall to be able to answer some of those questions and at least shape them so that when we have an opportunity to have a town hall with the community, you have all the information that you need about the background and about potentially how to implement going forward to then hear their response to what they may need or quite frankly, maybe what they don't like.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 04:51:41
      Would it be...
    • 04:51:43
      useful or helpful to you all if we went through the policy initiatives listed in the high-level focus document?
    • 04:51:54
      Is that something you had in mind that we would do today?
    • 04:51:57
      Is that more for our edification so that we can talk about it intelligently at some point down the road?
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 04:52:07
      We were open.
    • 04:52:08
      We wanted to make sure that you all had it in your packet for your edification to make sure that as you all are thinking through your work, the policies and processes that you all may wish to implement along with how you all plan to prioritize any goals or objectives, that you all were aware of some of the identified policy initiatives that your staff knew of
    • 04:52:33
      and also some of the complexities that are involved with pushing those forward, some of which may just take time, all of which take money almost, and some of which just haven't quite hit where we need in the timeline to move forward on them.
    • 04:52:51
      We are happy to have that discussion.
    • 04:52:53
      You do have all of us here to be able to provide you with any assistance as well as Mr. Bob is still with us to provide any expertise that he brings to the table from his wealth of experience in various jurisdictions, including many here in the Commonwealth.
    • 04:53:08
      So if that's something you would like to do, Mayor, we are certainly happy to be able to provide any assistance.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 04:53:13
      How do other counselors feel about that?
    • 04:53:16
      We believe our industry needs to change.
    • 04:53:18
      That's
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 04:53:22
      I think it's a good idea.
    • 04:53:24
      I feel like it seems like the folks who've been present over the last six months or a year, whatever, this is sort of their read on what we really need to, it's sort of their take of what we've been telling them that we want to do in a kind of crystallized format.
    • 04:53:46
      And so in that way, it seems like a good thing to do.
    • 04:53:48
      I wonder if
    • 04:53:51
      Do we do this in lieu of spending a lot of time working on a strategic plan?
    • 04:53:57
      Is this sort of a short-term thing that we do?
    • 04:54:00
      Or how does the strategic plan work into this?
    • 04:54:04
      It's been my experience with strategic plans is you spend a lot of time putting one together and then never follow it.
    • 04:54:11
      It just becomes bullet points on your... And I'm not really interested in that personally.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 04:54:17
      Well, there are a lot of different ways.
    • 04:54:19
      I've been involved in a number of strategic planning processes.
    • 04:54:24
      You can have them in widely varying degrees of complexity and depth.
    • 04:54:30
      I would note that the basic policies that were reflected at the beginning of the presentation, although they are old and sort of they're oldies but goodies,
    • 04:54:48
      I don't know that there's anything there that causes me to say, oh my goodness, not that, nor is there anything that immediately jumped out to me to say, we really don't value that any longer.
    • 04:55:00
      When we started to get into this kind of strategic planning process in September of 2020, my major concern was that I didn't want to spend a whole lot of time
    • 04:55:12
      just sort of going over these things word by word because I thought we were largely in agreement on the direction.
    • 04:55:22
      But it is certainly important that we, if nothing else, that we specifically reaffirm what we're working from.
    • 04:55:30
      or to say, we're not necessarily going to forego the broader discussion, but let's at least start from these principles as good operative principles.
    • 04:55:43
      And now let's kind of see where that leads us.
    • 04:55:46
      So that's a long way around to say, we can play it any of a number of different ways.
    • 04:55:52
      I would rather like you, Brian, probably not want to get into a lot of the detailed
    • 04:55:59
      almost like wordsmithing kinds of things.
    • 04:56:02
      But I do think it would be important and useful to, number one, basically just sort of go around and see whether we agree that the basic principles that are in the basic value statements.
    • 04:56:21
      I'm trying to find where the provision is.
    • 04:56:24
      It's at the very beginning of the packet.
    • 04:56:30
      that we're still good with those.
    • 04:56:32
      Let's see, the goals, you know, like an inclusive community of self-sufficient residents, a healthy and safe city, a beautiful and sustainable, natural and built environment, a strong, creative and diversified economy.
    • 04:56:49
      Goal five is a well-managed and responsive organization.
    • 04:56:53
      I think those are all excellent starting points and the high level focus document that was produced, we could link up each one of these items on the high level focus document to one or another of those goals.
    • 04:57:06
      If we were looking to do something that wasn't already one of those goals, I think that would give us a reason for pause, but I don't think that any of that is
    • 04:57:19
      is out of bounds of what we're already got in terms of goals.
    • 04:57:22
      Does anybody disagree with that?
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 04:57:25
      No.
    • 04:57:26
      I think it's kind of meaningless, but not objectionable.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 04:57:30
      Yeah, I mean, it's basically saying we want to do good things.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 04:57:36
      I think our strategic plan right now is just too broad.
    • 04:57:46
      I mean, I think it incorporates the values, but the problem is, is it's not guiding enough to staff because it's just about everything can fit in it.
    • 04:57:57
      You can find a way to justify lots of things in there or to say, no, we shouldn't do it because of this.
    • 04:58:04
      And from what I'm hearing is we really need to start giving some
    • 04:58:14
      more definitive direction, especially when it's coming to some of these hard choices, when we want to do it all and we can't.
    • 04:58:25
      And where is it in our strategic plan that it's backing that up, that is backing up staff who are trying to turn our vision into operational reality
    • 04:58:38
      to make those choices without having to constantly be asking which one is it you want.
    • 04:58:45
      And then we're being pushed and pulled constantly too.
    • 04:58:50
      Whoever at the time, because they're all good things.
    • 04:58:55
      They're all things we want to accomplish and half of them are on fire.
    • 04:59:02
      and so it's choosing which fires are we putting out first and hoping the rest don't spread and burn the rest of it down.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 04:59:10
      Ms.
    • 04:59:10
      Marshall pointed out that we've got time set aside with the Virginia Institute of Government when we would, I guess, probably do some sort of strategic planning.
    • 04:59:23
      I don't know what the plan is with them, but that sounds like what we would be doing.
    • 04:59:29
      I guess my thought is
    • 04:59:30
      is since we have one time with the Virginia Institute of Government, one time in February and one time in April, is that right?
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 04:59:39
      Yes, sir.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 04:59:40
      Okay.
    • 04:59:41
      So the question is between now and April, what are we going to do?
    • 04:59:46
      And my thought, I mean, frankly, looking at the high-level focus document, there are about five things that jumped out at me as things that we could begin, we as council,
    • 04:59:59
      could begin to do.
    • 05:00:00
      There are an awful lot of things that are essentially internal management issues that we on council may have to sort of give our final say-so on something, but probably aren't likely to get involved in the nitty-gritty of figuring out the plan.
    • 05:00:19
      I'm just thinking the details, for example, of human resource management
    • 05:00:25
      I don't know that it behooves us to try to get into the middle of some of that.
    • 05:00:31
      That strikes me as an internal kind of a problem.
    • 05:00:37
      I'm just wondering if we can get some agreement on a few things that we would like to see our time spent on and to begin to engage with the folks in the community whom we know want to be engaged with.
    • 05:00:56
      Climate Action is certainly one of them.
    • 05:01:01
      There are others as well.
    • 05:01:04
      The housing, zoning kinds of issues, transit kinds of issues.
    • 05:01:09
      One that comes to mind that's not on the list but certainly is on the list of the populace is trying to develop some kind of a plan for our historic resources.
    • 05:01:22
      The other HRC that we've got going on and
    • 05:01:25
      and city government, whether that's court square, whether that's public art, whether that's statues, whatever it may be.
    • 05:01:33
      I'm just thinking of things where we're getting pushed on by the public to do something, that would certainly be one as well.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 05:01:42
      So, Lourdes, I'm sorry, are you finished?
    • 05:01:46
      Go ahead.
    • 05:01:46
      Yeah, jump in.
    • 05:01:47
      Well, I think if what I'm hearing is that, you know, we're going to go through a
    • 05:01:53
      strategic plan kind of update between now and April.
    • 05:01:59
      I mean, I don't, and we certainly can't like redo it even, you know, partially now.
    • 05:02:05
      I think that, you know, to use what we have now kind of as a guide and we'll get public input
    • 05:02:13
      to guide us until we get to that point.
    • 05:02:16
      Is that what you're getting at?
    • 05:02:17
      I'm not sure.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:02:19
      That's certainly my preference.
    • 05:02:21
      What I'm really thinking is that I would like to be able to say to folks, we're not just going to be twiddling our thumbs for the next three months.
    • 05:02:32
      We're going to start doing some things in the next three months.
    • 05:02:37
      Obviously, one of the issues
    • 05:02:40
      is how is any of this likely to affect budget kinds of questions?
    • 05:02:46
      Because that's something that is going to be happening in the next three months.
    • 05:02:53
      Climate action is one of those things where I don't know whether there is a plan that would require additional budgetary resources in the next fiscal year.
    • 05:03:05
      We don't really have a plan for how we're going to develop a plan even at that point.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 05:03:13
      My thought is I don't know how completely this could be done in just a couple of months, but to me like the most important thing is having what we do have dollar amounts attached to it, timelines attached to it, and a knowledge of staff resources
    • 05:03:34
      necessary to do what would happen.
    • 05:03:35
      So I guess what I'm thinking would be most useful would be like as a council, we identify where a majority of us consider our biggest policy priorities, then figure out the money and new staff resources needed to make it happen.
    • 05:03:48
      And then as was put in the chat and you mentioned figuring out how, if at all, that will fit into our upcoming budget process.
    • 05:03:57
      Because I don't think we've had enough conversation
    • 05:04:00
      among ourselves or with the community, particularly about how we translate our priorities into this budget cycle.
    • 05:04:07
      For example, we approved rezonings for two PHA projects.
    • 05:04:12
      Well, the LIHTC application is coming up mid-March, and we haven't given any indication.
    • 05:04:18
      Not only will we try to fund them
    • 05:04:23
      for this LIHTC application period, if not this year, the next year, we haven't even indicated to them whether that's a priority in our budget to fund it ever, that kind of thing.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 05:04:36
      I'm just wondering for, yeah, that makes complete sense, Michael.
    • 05:04:39
      I'm just wondering for purposes of the meeting today, does it, since staff have put forward a document, this high-level document, whether we could at least sort of run down the main points and say if we
    • 05:04:52
      agree or should we add something or to take away some of that we wouldn't be able to get into all the specifics and timelines and so forth that Michael just mentioned that maybe if we agree that sort of confirm that they've sort of read our minds appropriately, then we could send them forth to come up with the budgets and the costs and the timing piece.
    • 05:05:16
      Since they've done that work already for us.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:05:20
      So I would ask staff, what would be useful to you?
    • 05:05:23
      What do you want from us?
    • 05:05:30
      I'll take any answer from anyone who wants to try to answer it.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 05:05:35
      So I'll jump in at a high level, even though my activity is usually related to your activity, which is drafting ordinances and that sort of thing.
    • 05:05:46
      But
    • 05:05:48
      As a practical matter because of where we are in the budget process it seems to me that the most urgent thing is to figure out which policy initiatives you all strongly want to make some progress on even if it's preliminary progress beginning in the next fiscal year so that staff can hear shortly
    • 05:06:16
      get you that information we were talking about earlier, get you some basic preliminary information about costs, consulting fees, whatever it might be necessary to make some progress on these things, whether it's for collective bargaining or a climate action plan, whatever it is, but tell us which of these things is your absolute top priority so that we can put together some information for you
    • 05:06:43
      and incorporate that into your discussions for the fiscal year 23 budget because you don't have long to talk about dollars in that budget.
    • 05:06:52
      But if you don't have that conversation quickly, there are a lot of things which require a substantial monetary commitment that won't be in the budget that's going to take you through June 30th of 2023.
    • 05:07:13
      So the urgent important things are even if it's just an initial piece, even if it's just we want you to engage a consultant to help us make initial decisions about a blueprint for a collective bargaining.
    • 05:07:29
      That gives everybody some information about how much money to put in the budget as a placeholder to pay for those services.
    • 05:07:40
      So if you all could look at this list, and again, it's long, but some of the things interact.
    • 05:07:46
      So collective bargaining appears across a number of the categories.
    • 05:07:52
      But some of these things, you know, that's all I can say.
    • 05:07:57
      If you don't make some decisions coming up soon about what needs to be in the fiscal year 23 budget that's not reflected there currently, you're going to lose the opportunity to have that conversation.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:08:12
      recognizing we don't know what's in the fiscal 23 budget.
    • 05:08:16
      That's a hard thing to deal with.
    • 05:08:17
      I mean, there are a few things that I think we probably can come up with an agreement on.
    • 05:08:28
      I guess my question as a matter of just sort of time management is whether it makes sense for us to do that right now for those of us who haven't
    • 05:08:42
      really had a chance to read this in detail, whether it would be possible to have that kind of a detailed discussion at our meeting on February 7th and whether that would be time enough to do what needs to be done.
    • 05:08:57
      Is that reasonable?
    • 05:09:00
      I'm not comfortable trying to look through what's clearly a document that has had a lot of thought from a lot of very intelligent people
    • 05:09:11
      and to sort of immediately say, oh, yes, one from column A, two from column B. Let's go.
    • Krisy Hammill
    • 05:09:19
      So I'll just interject myself in here a little bit.
    • 05:09:23
      You know, I think when you think about priorities and we get to these discussions, we quickly sort of migrate to very specific
    • 05:09:35
      Items.
    • 05:09:36
      And I think Lisa's point is really good that if there are some specific things that you want to address on the operating side, i.e., you know, we want money set aside for a consultant for collective bargaining or
    • 05:09:50
      something to that extent, those are things that you could talk about.
    • 05:09:55
      But I think if you zoom out a little bit higher, you know, as we talked to you this morning, and as we continue this conversation for quite some time about the CIP and putting in a large project or a large number and maxing out capacity
    • 05:10:15
      and our ability, I think one of the things that you're talking about there is you're losing your flexibility to address things like this that will likely come about every year.
    • 05:10:28
      So to Counselor Payne's question about, you know, the LIATEC money having that set aside or other things, it
    • 05:10:37
      you know whether it be those specific things I would encourage you that now would be the time to sort of think a little bit about the bigger picture in terms of how willing are you how much flexibility do you want to leave yourself for this budget as well as future budgets as you make sort of these bigger decisions about where you want to put things and then because when you don't have flexibility then it's hard to talk about these one-off
    • 05:11:06
      specifics.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 05:11:08
      Yeah, and I don't know if maybe this still isn't zoomed out enough, but to me, like, that's definitely the most pressing question is, where are we at a council in terms of our priorities for this immediate budget cycle in terms of, is a majority of, please let me know if I'm getting off on too much of a tangent, and this is a discussion for another time.
    • 05:11:28
      But, you know, is councils a majority even support a Tencent real estate tax?
    • 05:11:34
      Does council as a majority support
    • 05:11:40
      creating a budget that assuming there's a majority that wants a 10 cent real estate tax is comfortable putting off significant CIP projects for like a decade.
    • 05:11:55
      Are we comfortable with not having flexibility to actually make any deferred departmental requests
    • 05:12:03
      And then once we decide where a majority of council ed is on that, because
    • 05:12:12
      If we don't figure that out, I guess these conversations could sort of be a moot point if we just pass a budget that locks us out for a decade in our CIP and three to four years in our general fund for any significant new expenditures.
    • 05:12:27
      And that will be important to communicate to the community if that's a decision council makes because that will mean for a decade most housing providers won't be able to successfully apply for LIHTC
    • 05:12:41
      all kind of, you know, the climate action plan transit will be delayed for about a decade.
    • 05:12:46
      So we should, I feel like that's the foundational thing is counseling a point where they're comfortable saying that that's a possibility or not.
    • 05:12:54
      And if it's not, then I guess we can break down other priorities.
    • 05:13:02
      Again, that may be a tangent.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:13:03
      Well, it's not a tangent.
    • 05:13:10
      because it gets at, I mean, you're absolutely right.
    • 05:13:13
      It gets at the sort of the elephant in the room, so to speak, that if we're going to make a decision to go ahead with $75 million for Buford, and if we don't also have the sales tax increase that we've been talking about, then all of those things become problems.
    • 05:13:37
      We then don't have the
    • 05:13:39
      the ability, the flexibility to do all of these different things.
    • 05:13:45
      That gets to a discussion that I know we have had as individuals from time to time, but have never certainly tried to have in the last few months anyway, have not tried to have a discussion collectively.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 05:14:02
      Normally, there's a process that takes place before the budget writers begin its work, and that is a session with City Council around whether the priorities that City Council would like to see in the budget going forward.
    • 05:14:18
      What are the Council's priorities?
    • 05:14:19
      Now, obviously, when a budget is submitted, to the extent possible, it represents the City Council's priorities, and when City Council's thought to work through its budget,
    • 05:14:32
      because once the city manager submits a budget, it's no longer the city manager's budget, it's the city council's budget to work through with the city, with the city staff around its policies, practices, its policies that it would like to see funded going forward, you know, with the experts having provided, you know, the options and the costs and the implementation.
    • 05:14:55
      And so with the new
    • 05:15:02
      This high-level document is really a good document, candidly.
    • 05:15:08
      Many of those issues in here would probably not be, would be part of the budget process and should be part of the budget process, but what I'm hearing from some of the conversation that's taking place now is what is the city's capacity to implement
    • 05:15:31
      so many provisions of its, you know, strategic plans, some of the divisions of some of its housing policy, some of the provisions of some of its other policy, the policy decisions of city council that should be incorporated as part of the budget process and then given the option as to the city's capacity to fund those.
    • 05:15:53
      Or the other option is the city administration provides a budget
    • 05:15:59
      and then doing the work, doing the work in session with the city council, the council's priorities bubbles up to the top.
    • 05:16:08
      But generally, you know, going forward in the future, there's generally a conversation with city council, that's what are the budget priorities for the year coming up, and then the conversation and the debate takes place at the budget writing process that's doing the
    • 05:16:25
      doing a budget season and doing a budget when the budget is presented to a city council because at that point, the city, the community, you know, way they know it's, you know, it's priorities and, you know, it's just a series of budget sessions with the city council.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 05:16:40
      So, you know, my recommendation would be for the city councilors and staff to
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 05:16:55
      you know, take a somewhat of a time out of this session, but maybe at another session or even at today's session to drill down through this high-level focus and then the Council may add some items to this high-level focus.
    • 05:17:15
      For example, the issue that we just discussed regarding the housing policy, but this is really a
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 05:17:22
      Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch, Michael Koch
    • 05:17:51
      and do that between now and the meeting that you mentioned on the 7th, and then on the 7th, they could present to us what we've all sort of said collectively.
    • 05:18:03
      That would let us have some time to think through it and respond to them.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:18:09
      It occurs to me, by the way, that we have on February 2nd, we have our budget meeting with the school board.
    • 05:18:14
      On February 3rd, we have our first
    • 05:18:17
      budget meeting of our own, which is designated simply for consideration of revenues and expenses or something like that, something pretty general.
    • 05:18:25
      So we would have opportunities before February 7th to begin to engage on some of this.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 05:18:34
      So could we perhaps each one of us respond to that document prior to the meeting on the 3rd and then at the 3rd we kind of collectively share where we are?
    • 05:18:46
      Is that an idea?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:18:47
      That would sound reasonable to me.
    • 05:18:50
      Maybe if we did by, say, by February 1st, then staff can collate them into a document and recirculate it with all those choices out there.
    • SPEAKER_14
    • 05:19:00
      What does staff think?
    • 05:19:01
      Is that a good plan?
    • SPEAKER_11
    • 05:19:05
      That sounds like a reasonable plan.
    • 05:19:08
      And we do have 2-2-1 scheduled with you tomorrow and Friday where we can begin to start to hash out some of it just verbally and at least maybe highlight with you some questions.
    • 05:19:21
      I think that's where my head is right now is I will then be prepared to pose questions to you, give you time to go back and think about those and then respond accordingly.
    • 05:19:32
      And I agree.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:19:33
      We've been here for three or four days, so hey.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 05:19:36
      If it's possible to get it in a Word document, that would be helpful.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 05:19:42
      We can provide that in a Word document.
    • 05:19:44
      And I also would just agree
    • 05:19:46
      with Deputy City Manager Sanders, that that would be very helpful for us to go ahead and start speaking about this.
    • 05:19:52
      And then for us to pose any food for thought questions for you all, because as Mayor Snook mentioned, not everything on that list is necessarily something that will require council action, but it does take up staff time.
    • 05:20:06
      And some of it, A, needs to be done before then B, can occur, and B, may be one of your priorities.
    • 05:20:12
      Right.
    • 05:20:13
      That's why those items were included, not to say that, you know, surprise, you get to do all these hires, but more of that this will take the bandwidth of your staff, of your team, away from being able to potentially accomplish something else more quickly.
    • 05:20:30
      But there are things that must be done.
    • 05:20:31
      We can't defer them any longer.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:20:33
      So if we shoot for getting people, getting our
    • 05:20:40
      our responses back to staff by February 1, then maybe on February 3, we can talk intelligently.
    • 05:20:53
      Okay.
    • 05:20:54
      Sound like a plan?
    • 05:20:55
      Yes, Brian?
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 05:20:56
      Yeah, it sounds like a great plan.
    • 05:20:57
      I also think that Michael's point about really each of us thinking about how big an envelope are we willing to consider in terms of revenue is a really good
    • 05:21:10
      it's it's good food for thought between now and I guess the third or the seventh is is the is that when there's the actual budget conversation begins again or the third I suppose well and the fact if we've got to have a plan for the whole thing
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:21:28
      admittedly, it can be a pretty rough plan, but the whole budget, including the expense side by February 14th to justify the whatever tax increases we might be talking about, that puts us on a pretty short timeframe.
    • 05:21:46
      So gonna have to get thinking quick.
    • 05:21:51
      Okay, any further discussion on this topic for today?
    • 05:21:56
      If not, then we can move on to the second piece of our afternoon work.
    • 05:22:02
      And this is something where it's a let's get down to business review and discussion of council meeting procedures and says that discussion led by Vice Mayor Wade and me with input from cast of characters.
    • 05:22:20
      Mr. Bob, I don't know if you intend to stick around for any of this.
    • 05:22:22
      You're welcome, of course, but
    • 05:22:24
      If you've got other things you'd rather be doing, this isn't really in your wheelhouse.
    • SPEAKER_07
    • 05:22:27
      Okay.
    • SPEAKER_12
    • 05:22:34
      Thanks, and good luck with the rest of the session.
    • 05:22:39
      When you have your meeting on the third, I certainly would like to participate in that with regard to the budget and the priorities.
    • 05:22:49
      I'll just leave and say that
    • 05:22:52
      One of the things that I've said a long time ago, and I say frequently, the budget is really the Super Bowl of local government, so good luck.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:23:03
      Thank you very much.
    • 05:23:06
      Okay, business review and discussion of council meeting procedures.
    • 05:23:14
      What's the best way to begin to approach this topic?
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 05:23:19
      Well, I think that this is one that I particularly wanted us to discuss, and that is to, and I think that we certainly have, you know, start to address this, but just to kind of address the, the, the meetings.
    • 05:23:33
      I mean, we have some very important issues to discuss and, and, um,
    • 05:23:38
      And I just felt that even way before I got on council, and I'm used to long meetings, I understand that, but I mean, you know, some of the meetings can go well after midnight, and like our last meeting started at four, and I wonder it was early rises, and I'm not complaining or anything, but my day starts early, I'm early rise, I get up at five o'clock, usually I'm up, and so I just know that for the public,
    • 05:24:05
      and certainly for us that, you know, after meetings go four, five, six, seven, eight hours sometimes, it's just not conducive to making good judgment.
    • 05:24:15
      So just looking at ways that we could, you know, make our meetings more concise, not only for ourselves, but definitely for staff.
    • 05:24:23
      And I just want to use this opportunity now to see, to really look at our agenda, the floor of our meetings, to see if there are ways that we can
    • 05:24:36
      make them shorter and sometimes I understand that it's big topics and they just have to it's just long meetings but that should be the exception and not the norm so I don't know y'all may have already discussed this as a board I'm sorry as a council many times but I think that this is one because one of the things that I would like to do not you know
    • 05:25:03
      Bryan and I had many things that we talked about when we were on the campaign trails.
    • 05:25:07
      And one of them is that we want to make this running for council just more doable for anyone to do.
    • 05:25:14
      And right now, if you have a job and you have a family, having meetings to go to one, two o'clock in the morning is just not feasible and it's just not fair.
    • 05:25:25
      And if we're making these big decisions, as we talked about before, multi-million dollar type of projects,
    • 05:25:31
      after hours and hours.
    • 05:25:34
      Mr. Mayor, I just want to look at ways we can see how we can reduce it.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 05:25:42
      And I completely agree with that, Vice Mayor Wade.
    • 05:25:44
      I think very well stated.
    • 05:25:46
      The other thing that I think gets lost sometimes is that most of the public is not able to be watching events on Zoom or along being down at City Hall between
    • 05:26:01
      at 9 p.m.
    • 05:26:02
      and 1 o'clock in the morning.
    • 05:26:03
      And so, you know, it's not that we're hiding anything or doing anything in the middle of the night or whatever.
    • 05:26:11
      It's all people can very much participate.
    • 05:26:14
      But at the same time, I don't think it's fair to many of our citizens if the barrier to participation is so high because we're going so late.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:26:26
      Well, and I note that in our procedures we've already got,
    • 05:26:30
      says the council's goal at regular meetings is to adjourn no later than 11 p.m.
    • 05:26:37
      And although I think we've adjourned before 11 p.m.
    • 05:26:41
      the last couple of meetings, that certainly has not been common over the last two years.
    • 05:26:48
      I think if there are ways that we could streamline our procedures to make it more likely that we would adjourn before 11 p.m., that would be very reasonable.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 05:27:04
      I've got a few suggestions, actually, to streamline this.
    • 05:27:09
      One, and some of the things are already in our meeting procedures.
    • 05:27:13
      One, we're supposed to, counselors ourselves, we're supposed to have time limits on our responses.
    • 05:27:20
      And so running the clock during counselors speaking as well, I think needs to be done.
    • 05:27:29
      I think the idea of when it's incorporating into the structure of talking about something coming forward, that we start incorporating more of a structure to that by calling on each of the counselors and asking, do you have something?
    • 05:27:51
      Do you have questions on this topic?
    • 05:27:52
      Yes, no.
    • 05:27:53
      Do you have questions?
    • 05:27:56
      and then again just kind of bringing all of that because it's and some of this is Zoom I know but to bringing a little bit more structure to the whole part of the meeting not just I know we tend to focus a lot on public comment being something that takes a lot of time but there's ways that we can also structure ourselves
    • 05:28:24
      to be a little bit more the word parsimony.
    • 05:28:30
      And I know I'm now going over time that I would.
    • 05:28:34
      So I think really if we start a timer on ourselves, that might help us.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 05:28:43
      I'll just add that you might have noticed that the last couple of meetings, it's been a continuous meeting rather than breaking it up into work session,
    • 05:28:53
      and then the regular meeting, part of that reason that we had to break it up before was because the meetings were so long and Zoom would cut off at the eight hour mark and being in a meeting for eight hours and Zoom cuts you off is pretty, it can be pretty embarrassing.
    • 05:29:10
      So we did run into that one time and after that we split the meetings.
    • 05:29:14
      So we'd rather have it as one continuous meeting so that we can do one video
    • 05:29:22
      and have that available for the public to watch all at one time, as well as for the purpose of taking minutes and everything else that goes along with having an efficient meeting.
    • 05:29:34
      Staff do convene on the very next day to begin planning for the next meeting.
    • 05:29:39
      So getting out at a reasonable time is also helpful for staff.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 05:29:50
      So as we to throw in some things that we are considering to reduce the meeting.
    • 05:29:59
      I've only been to two meetings so far, but as I recall, we have public to speak after the consent for the consent agenda item.
    • 05:30:07
      Is that correct?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:30:10
      We have at the moment three times.
    • 05:30:12
      The first is
    • 05:30:14
      if they want to speak on anything that's on the consent agenda.
    • 05:30:17
      Most of the time there is nothing except that people think that they are to be speaking then.
    • 05:30:23
      They're more often wrong than they are right about that.
    • 05:30:26
      The second time is immediately after that, basically, after the consent agenda and after we've had a response
    • 05:30:36
      from staff as to any matters brought up in public comments through the meeting before.
    • 05:30:42
      Then we come to new round of public comments.
    • 05:30:46
      Then we have a round of public comments at the end.
    • 05:30:50
      As I read these policies, the round of public comment at the end is really intended only for people who didn't get to speak earlier in the meeting.
    • 05:31:02
      We've never enforced that.
    • 05:31:04
      We've always treated it, in the last couple of years anyway, we've always treated it as a second time, as basically a rebuttal.
    • 05:31:12
      If somebody wants to give a rebuttal or they want to say, I said this at the beginning of the meeting and I'm still mad about it at the end of the meeting.
    • 05:31:20
      If we're looking for ways to even simply to enforce the rules that we've got, we could decide to enforce that rule and then we may well have
    • 05:31:32
      I don't know.
    • 05:31:32
      I'm not going to say it's going to cut an hour out of anything, but it could cut 15 minutes or so out of the end of the meeting.
    • 05:31:39
      Brian?
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 05:31:40
      Yeah, I just wonder if we've got one set of responses that are directed to the consent agenda, and then we have one whole section of the meeting called community matters, community response.
    • 05:31:54
      There's 12 or 16 slots there.
    • 05:31:56
      16?
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 05:31:56
      16.
    • 05:31:56
      Yeah.
    • 05:32:01
      Is there a reason that we have to have a further one at the very end of the meeting?
    • 05:32:05
      I mean, I don't understand this three separate times.
    • 05:32:10
      It seems to me like having one time that's for the consent agenda, one time that's for sort of the meat of that meeting.
    • 05:32:17
      That should be enough.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:32:20
      Well, the idea, I think, was that we were going to limit the number of times, number of speakers at the beginning of the meeting
    • 05:32:27
      so that we could get to the meat of the agenda at a somewhat more normal time.
    • 05:32:34
      And then whoever didn't get to speak first time around would be able to speak at the end.
    • 05:32:40
      I think that was the original concept.
    • 05:32:42
      And as I look at the document we've got, that's what was written.
    • 05:32:47
      Yeah.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 05:32:50
      I know maybe it's different outside of Charlottesville, but for public bodies in Charlottesville, it seemed pretty standard to have, whether it be the Planning District Commission, MPO, or other bodies, like the public comment period, both at the beginning and end.
    • 05:33:04
      So to me, it doesn't strike me as, you know, totally out of the ordinary or something that should be eliminated, but
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 05:33:19
      I would be against eliminating the end public comment, but I wouldn't be against it being for people who didn't get a chance to speak in the beginning.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 05:33:36
      So we just, I see Keena just added a note about consideration for closed meetings at the end.
    • 05:33:45
      So, and do we have
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 05:33:49
      a good idea.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 05:33:50
      Consideration is for many times we have people speak several times and we have some people want to speak at least once and don't get an opportunity.
    • 05:34:03
      How have you all handled that in the past?
    • 05:34:07
      Is there any kind of equity or fairness in addressing that?
    • 05:34:12
      How have you all done that?
    • 05:34:17
      We do it now, I guess.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 05:34:20
      There's no limit at the end of the meeting to the amount of people who can speak.
    • 05:34:25
      So if somebody hasn't had a chance to speak earlier, they can speak at the end.
    • 05:34:32
      So there shouldn't be a time when someone doesn't have a chance to speak.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 05:34:36
      So is that, I mean, I know at the last minute it wasn't, I mean, but is that one of the factors that's driving the meetings to be long at the,
    • 05:34:44
      you know, because if it's no fact that you could get two, you know, couple hours of public input is that, you know, I'm trying to see way because if we have several different opportunities for public to, and I know I asked this before in our smaller meetings, it's like what are other localities doing?
    • 05:35:10
      Is what I'm talking about out of the norm?
    • 05:35:14
      I don't want to seem like I'm curtailing public input.
    • 05:35:17
      But again, we want to make this so that everyone can have access.
    • 05:35:23
      And that's what I'm trying to determine.
    • SPEAKER_07
    • 05:35:28
      I was going to say that so it's 16 speakers at three minutes a piece.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 05:35:32
      That's 48 minutes.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 05:35:41
      So if you call it an hour at the beginning of public input.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 05:35:44
      Let's just say there's like an hour.
    • 05:35:48
      We don't really have that many people speaking during the consent agenda usually.
    • 05:35:55
      It depends on what's on there.
    • 05:35:58
      But that's not usually for very long.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 05:36:02
      Is that limited, Sena, to a certain amount?
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 05:36:07
      It's three minutes a speaker, but it has to be about something on the consent agenda.
    • 05:36:11
      So it's got to be in reference to something on the consent agenda.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 05:36:15
      Yeah, but it can't really enforce.
    • 05:36:19
      And, you know, once someone starts to talk, I mean, that's another time where it could be one or two hours there, potentially, of, you know, speakers.
    • 05:36:29
      So if we, you know, can...
    • 05:36:31
      I don't know legally if we can limit that part.
    • 05:36:35
      I'm trying to see how we can put our arms around this.
    • 05:36:41
      I'm sorry, go ahead.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 05:36:43
      Honestly, if you look back at old meetings, I would say we are just as responsible for the length of the meetings as our constituents are.
    • 05:37:01
      I just I want to that we as counselors also in wanting to either make sure we're getting our points across as to why we're voting for something or asking questions about the packet that we weren't able to get to during our two two ones that that takes up a lot of the time.
    • 05:37:24
      Um,
    • 05:37:27
      There are things I think we can limit a little bit when it comes to the public comment part, but we also just have a very vocal constituency.
    • 05:37:43
      And we also tend to spend a lot of time asking questions and debating about things.
    • 05:37:50
      So if we want to limit the time on the meetings, we should also be looking to ourselves and how we can kind of
    • 05:37:58
      make sure we're employing parsimony and our own questions.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 05:38:03
      Yeah, it makes a lot of sense, Sena.
    • 05:38:11
      Do we know what Albemarle County does or other?
    • 05:38:15
      Can someone give us some sort of guide, some comparison cases?
    • 05:38:19
      I mean, we don't have to be just like Albemarle County, but do they have the three separate times?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:38:25
      No.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 05:38:26
      What do they have, Lloyd?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:38:29
      My understanding, I remember I was discussing this with a supervisor recently who was amazed that we do as much public comment time as we do.
    • 05:38:41
      I don't remember whether they just have one opportunity at the beginning of the meeting or what.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 05:38:49
      Well, the other thing is for whatever, you know, to...
    • 05:38:55
      To Sena's point, the level of engagement from our community is just going to be different than it is in a lot of other localities.
    • 05:39:04
      Albemarle County just usually does think it's very rare that their one public comment period even fills up on its own.
    • 05:39:13
      To Sena's point about our end, one of the things that comes to mind in terms of the length of meetings are
    • 05:39:24
      Would there be any use to, I know the Planning District Commission and other bodies for an agenda item will sort of just have an estimated time allocated to that item.
    • 05:39:36
      It's not a hard limit, but it's just to help
    • 05:39:39
      guide the conversation of how long do we expect this to take, you know, if we're reaching the end, do we want to narrow this down to our decision points, if that would be useful.
    • 05:39:51
      Likewise, is there, I don't know what's going on with it, but would there be ways to improve like
    • 05:39:59
      working to set the agenda in terms of just figuring out the total time we estimate it to take and other things that we know we could put on another agenda and sort of balance it that way.
    • 05:40:10
      And the third is just, are there any best practices in terms of
    • 05:40:17
      How we could moderate ourselves as a body in terms of limiting, you know, going off on tangents, you know, narrowing it back to our decision points if we're sort of going past a time limit and whether we see any any time we could ring out through those things to, you know, streamline meetings.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 05:40:40
      So I think that that.
    • 05:40:45
      You know, the last few meetings have definitely been better than in the past.
    • 05:40:51
      I think that what I would suggest is that honorable mayor uses his authority that, you know, if we see someone, you know, that's doing consent agenda that's maybe speaking not on the agenda, something on the consent agenda to tell them that, you know, that this is not an opportunity and that we adhere to our
    • 05:41:16
      Governance that we not
    • 05:41:20
      curtail our comments to as best we can and that we definitely stick to that 11 or 1130 rule that we have and that maybe towards 1030 if it's looking like we still have a way to go that Madam Clerk let us know that we have a ways to go and our rules say that we're going to stop here soon so that we know how to
    • 05:41:48
      move things to Nick's agenda, how we're going, what plan of attack that we're going to take, and that we revisit this, I said six months or something down the road to, you know, because if we're doing three times as much public input, because many people that come speak on our topics are actually county
    • 05:42:11
      you know non city residents I should say that you know they may not be I don't know where they're from and that and that's that's great that we did we have that but again we want to make this being a city councilor something that you know you know the regular folk could do you know I know that I have to be at work at eight o'clock the next morning and again I'm not crying
    • 05:42:37
      But if we want people to be able to have a nine to five job, we can't say, okay, we're going to have unlimited public input and meetings could go to two or three o'clock in the morning because we know that the pay that we get for this, you know, it can't sustain, you know, one's well-being, you know, you can't live off of that.
    • 05:42:56
      So this is one of my, not pet peeves, one of my issues that, you know, I want to see meetings in a
    • 05:43:07
      You know, because I've been on the other end of being staff for, you know, the staff that's in, you know, when we're meeting in person, but I know that we still have staff now that's, you know, waiting to speak on a particular topic.
    • 05:43:21
      And so we want to be fair to the public because many, you know, public wants to speak on something and they can't and that we want to be fair to ourselves.
    • 05:43:32
      and to staff.
    • 05:43:33
      And I think that if we don't find some way to, you know, with all the opportunities we have for input, and again, I know that it's important, but other localities are having, you know, public input without, you know, all of the
    • 05:43:50
      We hear from many of the people numerous times as well.
    • 05:43:53
      So that's just my input.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 05:43:57
      Well, no, I think it's a very fair point that the length of the meetings is an issue both for the practicality of people wanting to or being able to do city council and work nine to five jobs for staff, as well as for the community who may not be able to
    • 05:44:16
      You know, stay on for a full nine hour meeting when a very important decision is being made at 1am or 1230.
    • 05:44:24
      So I definitely, you know, that's a fair point I agree with.
    • 05:44:29
      In the two years I've been on council, the end public comment and the
    • 05:44:39
      Consent agenda comment.
    • 05:44:42
      My impression has been really isn't what drives the meeting length.
    • 05:44:45
      You know, it does add a few minutes, but it just hasn't been the critical thing.
    • 05:44:50
      So that's just my thought.
    • 05:44:52
      I mean, even if we change that, I don't think it would make a significant difference in the lengths of meetings.
    • 05:44:56
      And we've got to, I almost wonder whether on our, to Sena's point on our end, in terms of how we as a council set our agenda as a sort of moderate ourselves,
    • 05:45:07
      whether whether that's an area we could sort of get better at to really shave off some time.
    • 05:45:12
      But just my two cents.
    • 05:45:14
      And I think it's a very fair point.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:45:16
      Well, one of the things that I'm noticing in the in our procedures right now that we're not doing is after any individual completes his or their remarks to counsel, any counselor or the city manager may respond as they see fit.
    • 05:45:32
      To assure the orderly progress of the meeting, the presiding officer shall ensure that collectively responses to any individual's remarks will not exceed a period of about two minutes.
    • 05:45:44
      So that suggests a couple things.
    • 05:45:45
      One is we've typically not had any response at all if we wanted to make a response to somebody's comment.
    • 05:45:55
      But this suggests that we ought to be making the response sort of right away rather than saving it to the end.
    • 05:46:03
      That might also have the benefit that sometimes you have the same person or you have the same issue being raised by three or four different people in the course of the 16.
    • 05:46:16
      And if we were to address it up front, you know, early on, the first time it comes up, maybe the next few people wouldn't feel a need to reinforce something that is basically, you know, based on misapprehension of facts.
    • 05:46:30
      But second, you know, there have certainly been times in the last couple of years when the response from counsel, in fact, usually the response from the presiding officer has greatly exceeded two minutes.
    • 05:46:45
      And if we were to adhere to that ourselves, we could probably hold down the number of times we run long.
    • 05:46:55
      It occurs to me overall that maybe what we ought to do is to say, what can we do to make it reasonably likely that we actually get to the first thing on the decisions that have to get made by 730?
    • 05:47:13
      What would we have to do to get to that point?
    • 05:47:16
      Would we have to, first of all, curtail our own comments, surely?
    • 05:47:20
      Would we have to
    • 05:47:22
      cut short and maybe say two minutes, not three minutes or three minutes times 10 versus three minutes times 16.
    • 05:47:33
      I just think it's really unfair to people who are signing on because they have something that they're there at our request.
    • 05:47:43
      They're there because we have a matter that they have to be involved
    • 05:47:50
      on a discussion of or a decision and we've gotten to some of those people after midnight and that's just terribly unfair to them as well as frankly being unfair to ourselves and being unfair to the staff who are going to have to stay up and I still remember the meeting we had in July of 2020 that went to 2.30 in the morning.
    • 05:48:13
      I also remember that that marks the first and only time that I can recall
    • 05:48:19
      that we actually voted to go past 11 o'clock and then we voted to go past 1230.
    • 05:48:27
      And I think I am still the only person who has ever voted against going beyond 1230.
    • 05:48:33
      I think we should never, ever be going beyond 1230.
    • 05:48:40
      And we ought to be trying very, very hard to be over by 11.
    • 05:48:45
      And that means we ought to be trying to get started
    • 05:48:48
      not just started at 6.30, but started on the meat of the agenda earlier.
    • 05:48:54
      If we have time limits that we've fixed for ourselves so that we have a sense that we've laid out a reasonable agenda for that meeting.
    • 05:49:02
      I mean, a meeting that went to 2.30 in the morning, it was gonna be obvious very early on that that meeting was not gonna be over by 11.
    • 05:49:09
      We had not had a meeting earlier in July.
    • 05:49:12
      It was like 17 different items on the agenda.
    • 05:49:16
      and we should have exercised some discretion at the beginning to say we're just not going to do that.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 05:49:22
      I think a lot of those did have necessary timelines though that we had to get on Duntuck because of CARES and other beginning of the fiscal year issues.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:49:33
      I just remember the discussion that involved equity that involved the person from the University of Virginia who started speaking at 1.35 a.m.
    • 05:49:47
      and that's nuts.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 05:49:51
      Lloyd, do you think there would be utility and doing as planning district commissions and others done as sort of just having an estimated time allotment for each agenda item and that way we have a sense on our end from a time management like the total time we would like to structure the whole meeting and that way we at least have a schedule that we know at the beginning of like
    • 05:50:17
      If we followed the time, we'd be over by 10 or 1030.
    • 05:50:21
      Yeah, I'd be willing to do that.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:50:23
      It means that the meetings to discuss the agenda that I would have with city manager's office would have to be, you know, we'd have to focus on that pretty early on and really think about how we're structuring the agenda.
    • 05:50:38
      But there's, I have no fear of thinking early.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 05:50:41
      I mean, the county does their agendas three months in advance.
    • 05:50:47
      I mean, they, it's very rare that they put something on their agenda that isn't very planned for, and I know we keep having, now I know COVID and some other issues have caused that to be a little bit harder, but if we can start trying to work toward that, and I think that might be an area that is helpful.
    • 05:51:16
      You know, did we have to have two PUD PUD discussions on the same agenda?
    • 05:51:22
      That's, I mean, those are things that are asking for a lot of change and would take, are going to take a lot of conversation.
    • 05:51:29
      So, you know, large items like that, unless there is a real, very clear reason as to why, maybe they should be being moved.
    • 05:51:41
      And if items towards the end of the agenda don't get dealt with by 11 o'clock,
    • 05:51:46
      They go on to the next agenda.
    • 05:51:48
      So the agenda is written with timeline prioritizations in it that the media, the agenda is met with.
    • 05:51:57
      And if we don't get to the ones at the end, then they go on to the next one in two weeks.
    • 05:52:03
      I'd also like to remind you that the reason that massive meeting with the consultants with the various invited guests at the end for the reports was what caused us to then start having that reports menu
    • 05:52:16
      that reports part of the meeting starting at four o'clock every at the second meeting of the- Yeah.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:52:23
      And that- I'm sorry, redundant?
    • SPEAKER_07
    • 05:52:27
      Yeah.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:52:28
      Okay.
    • 05:52:30
      One thing that I think will help, I was talking about this with Mr. Sanders and Ms.
    • 05:52:38
      Marshall on the question of like the SUPs and so on.
    • 05:52:47
      There are certain factual issues that developed, and sometimes they developed between the Planning Commission and the City Council meeting, or they arose at the Planning Commission meeting and were not fully resolved at the Planning Commission meeting.
    • 05:53:05
      And one of the thoughts, I think Mr. Sanders was mentioning it, that maybe he gets together with Mr. Freeze from NDS
    • 05:53:15
      and basically says it doesn't come to counsel until these factual issues have been figured out.
    • 05:53:23
      One of the things that I hate in just about every situation is to be arguing about facts that could be known if we just had time to go look them up, just had time to go find them out.
    • 05:53:38
      That's one of the reasons that our family, my kids used to
    • 05:53:42
      We had the Encyclopedia Britannica 20 feet away.
    • 05:53:46
      So if somebody wanted to have an argument about what the capital of Ecuador was, rather than people trying to remember it, we could go look it up.
    • 05:53:54
      I hate arguing about things we can know.
    • 05:53:57
      And so when we're talking about, for example, on the Park Street PUDs, issues about the traffic counts that came up at the first meeting that caused us to delay it and have a second
    • 05:54:10
      hearing on this last meeting, we wound up having that discussion simply because the facts had been identified earlier.
    • 05:54:24
      They weren't new facts presented to us for the first time during the city council meeting.
    • 05:54:31
      They had been presented, but nobody had sort of run the facts down and gotten a staff memo on it and said, here's the answer, boom, boom, boom.
    • 05:54:41
      And so more of that, maybe we can head off some of these issues where we end up arguing about things that could be knowable.
    • 05:54:48
      We can make a decision the first time around and that would help.
    • 05:54:53
      That doesn't have anything to do with our procedures here specifically, but it may help a great deal in terms of what happens behind the scenes.
    • 05:55:03
      The other comment I wanted to make is there's an anonymous attendee has posed a question.
    • 05:55:09
      says, I have several suggestions.
    • 05:55:11
      One, this suggests that only citizens who live in the city are able to make commentary at the council meetings.
    • 05:55:17
      Two, citizens should only be able to comment once during a meeting.
    • 05:55:22
      And three, citizens are not able to convey their speaking time to someone else.
    • 05:55:27
      Anybody have thoughts on any of those?
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 05:55:30
      Did we get into First Amendment issues or something?
    • 05:55:39
      We don't allow a county person to speak.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 05:55:44
      Okay, I got one.
    • 05:55:48
      We can't limit people.
    • 05:55:50
      If they need to speak on something on the agenda that has an open ability to speak, I think we have to allow them to speak on that item when it comes up.
    • 05:56:00
      There's certain items on the agenda that they're open that legally we have to give people a chance to speak on.
    • 05:56:10
      and I don't think that should necessarily get mixed up with the public comment because the public comment, I mean, in my mind, public comment's supposed to be there for citizens to come forward and bring us issues that we might not have heard about.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 05:56:25
      Then let's see.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 05:56:33
      Maybe if it's only citizens who live in the city
    • 05:56:39
      I mean, that also, I mean, I have mixed feelings on that.
    • 05:56:42
      Part of me wants to say yes.
    • 05:56:45
      But the other thing is, is we keep talking about how we've got to think beyond just being our city, that we have to, you know, we have to embrace that we're a regional, we're a region and that we have regional problems.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 05:57:02
      We also have to be able to verify that information.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 05:57:08
      and someone could just put an address of a friend's house down for all we know.
    • 05:57:15
      And the conveying they're speaking to somebody else, that just means they've gotten, they've been, I mean, we saw that more often when we were in council chambers and somebody couldn't get there in time because they worked.
    • 05:57:26
      And so somebody else would sign their name to be there for them to hold their spot.
    • 05:57:31
      And so we still had, it's still that 16 spots got used.
    • 05:57:36
      It's so I don't really see how that saves any time.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 05:57:39
      It makes it a little less convenient for some people.
    • 05:57:45
      That's it.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 05:57:47
      Well, and we do ask people to sign up in advance to speak and we ask them to give us their topic that they want to speak about.
    • 05:57:56
      And then we have people who might start out talking about one thing and then convey their time to someone else and
    • 05:58:04
      We don't really have parameters around keeping people to what they signed up for.
    • 05:58:08
      I don't know that we can put guardrails around that.
    • 05:58:13
      Once someone starts speaking, we can't really hold them to what they signed up for or the fact that we're in a Zoom environment and there could be multiple people sharing a three-minute slot.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 05:58:28
      I would just like to go back and ask, what is the
    • 05:58:33
      and first of all, I think the ideas that have been put forward to put time sort of time guidance around topics agenda items makes a lot of sense.
    • 05:58:44
      I think us trying to discipline ourselves in terms of just moving the meetings forward, that makes a lot of sense.
    • 05:58:51
      I'm still struggling with what is the point of that last Michael has said that it doesn't add that much time to the meetings, but maybe it doesn't, but that last sort of
    • 05:59:03
      community response.
    • 05:59:04
      The meeting is over.
    • 05:59:05
      Everything's been said and done.
    • 05:59:07
      We're not going to speak in response to them until, I guess, later on the next meeting when we come and get together.
    • 05:59:13
      What is this sort of vision or purpose or goal of that last opportunity for people to talk?
    • 05:59:19
      Because we're basically, realistically, we've carved out about an hour of the community matters in the middle of the meeting, probably, I don't know, half an hour at the consent agenda.
    • 05:59:31
      So we've got an hour and a half of opportunity for people to speak.
    • 05:59:35
      And then at the end, we're going to add on in another 30 minutes.
    • 05:59:40
      It just seems like a lot to me, particularly at the very end of the meeting.
    • 05:59:45
      So I'm just wondering what is the
    • 05:59:52
      What are we gaining as a body, as a community by having that extra time?
    • 05:59:57
      If it's worth it, if we feel like, yeah, we're getting feedback that's necessary that we wouldn't get some other way, then I get it.
    • 06:00:05
      I support your position, Sena, in terms of we want to be responsive.
    • 06:00:09
      But I feel like if we've spent an hour and a half of our meeting taking on questions, we've already kind of done that.
    • 06:00:17
      We've been responsive.
    • 06:00:18
      We've proven that.
    • 06:00:19
      And then
    • 06:00:21
      Again, people are able to reach out to us during the week, and they do.
    • 06:00:25
      So I just would like to know what the net gain to the community is beyond kind of a sort of vague or being responsive for that last opportunity to speak.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 06:00:40
      I would think the argument for it would be two things.
    • 06:00:46
      One is
    • 06:00:52
      At Community Matters, you can sign up in advance.
    • 06:00:59
      But if more people have signed up, then the slots reserved for those who've signed up, you know, it's a lottery.
    • 06:01:07
      And so basically, the slots may fill up before
    • 06:01:11
      and you're unable to have any opportunity to speak if you don't want to speak on the consent agenda.
    • 06:01:17
      So it's an opportunity at the end of the meeting, if that is a situation in signups for public comment or fool that someone still has an opportunity to speak.
    • 06:01:26
      And I would think the second argument would just be an end of meeting an individual who maybe didn't have any thoughts or
    • 06:01:36
      At the beginning of the meeting, a decision could have been made or a discussion could have happened around an agenda item in the interim period between the first community matters in the end of the meeting that they may want to weigh in on to express this concern to council or the city manager.
    • 06:01:56
      and ideally it would be about some policy issue or issue in the community that they would have an ability to follow up on and respond to them about.
    • 06:02:08
      So at least from my perspective, that would be the two arguments for why there is a section at the end of the meeting.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:02:17
      And like I said, I'm willing to entertain that being for people who have not had a chance to speak before.
    • 06:02:24
      I mean, I would be against ending it entirely, though, because I always thought it was for people who were unable to sign up.
    • 06:02:35
      When we started having that, that people could sign up via email a number of years ago, as I recall, people started getting very worried that they wouldn't have a chance to speak.
    • 06:02:52
      and we also started limiting the amount of slots that we had.
    • 06:02:55
      Before that we had, I believe it was open.
    • 06:02:59
      It was however many people wanted to speak.
    • 06:03:01
      We didn't have a limited amount of slots.
    • 06:03:06
      And so by allowing people at the end of the meeting to speak who haven't had a chance to speak, I think that's important.
    • 06:03:17
      That's all.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:03:18
      Yeah, well, that makes sense.
    • 06:03:20
      So would a way forward be, we keep that time, but we just, you can't speak in that time if you've already spoken earlier on.
    • 06:03:30
      Is that something that you could agree to, Sena?
    • 06:03:34
      As far as the community?
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:03:35
      Yeah, as long as it's also not about certain topics on the agenda that people have a right to speak to, because they're a first reading.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:03:47
      I've also been looking at procedures more.
    • 06:03:49
      We do not actually have a procedure for a comment period related to the consent agenda.
    • 06:03:57
      We could eliminate that and not have to change anything here.
    • 06:04:03
      But it would have to be the community matters.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:04:06
      That's in the current procedures.
    • 06:04:09
      That's in the current procedures.
    • 06:04:12
      It's under section...
    • 06:04:23
      1D5, after the clerk of council concludes reading the consent agenda, the mayor will ask if anyone in attendance at the council meeting wishes to speak on matters listed on the consent agenda.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:04:36
      Okay, I was looking at paragraph D1A,
    • 06:04:40
      which says that the community matters comment period prior to taking up matters on a consent agenda, action items agenda or items for discussion agenda, which makes it sound like that public comment period is intended to address the consent agenda as well as action items agenda and so on.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:04:59
      It was before the consent agenda got moved to before public comment.
    • 06:05:03
      Because remember the consent agenda used to be after public comment.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:05:12
      We are going to have to tighten up the rules to reflect these procedures to reflect what you want to do.
    • 06:05:18
      So if you want to have community matters first, then the consent agenda, we need to write it one way.
    • 06:05:25
      If you want to have consent agenda first, then your first community matters, we're going to need to edit these procedures a little bit.
    • 06:05:32
      The procedures need to reflect what you actually want to do or continue doing
    • 06:05:38
      as you go forward.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:05:40
      I think the consent agenda needs to remain before public comment because oftentimes we have staff who are only there for the consent agenda and we don't need to have them waiting around a whole other hour plus for the public comment pertaining to them.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 06:06:01
      So I agree.
    • 06:06:02
      So Mr. Chair, so I think that, you know, speaking of how we
    • 06:06:07
      can labor on the topic as board.
    • 06:06:10
      I think that we're in the process of that now.
    • 06:06:13
      So what I'm hearing is that we have an opportunity at the beginning, three minutes, 16 people and eight of them are, you have to sign up ahead.
    • 06:06:24
      The other eight, I guess they can do it right there at the meeting.
    • 06:06:33
      Then there's an opportunity for consent items that's on the consent agenda.
    • 06:06:41
      And then anytime we have a topic that we speak on, the public can speak on it, you know, on that topic.
    • 06:06:53
      And then we have an opportunity at the end.
    • 06:07:01
      Am I getting all of the opportunities?
    • 06:07:05
      I mean, public speaking?
    • 06:07:08
      Okay.
    • 06:07:09
      And so what I'm hearing is that some of us are really kind of think that, you know, we need to kind of, you know, keep what we're doing.
    • 06:07:19
      Some of us are saying, you know, we need to really, you know, change it.
    • 06:07:23
      And maybe the changes that we're considering really won't have a big impact on
    • 06:07:28
      the meeting.
    • 06:07:29
      I think that the last two meetings have not been unreasonable, unreasonably long.
    • 06:07:36
      I think that once we started talking on the last two topics, like at the last meeting, it was about an hour each.
    • 06:07:42
      And I think that each of us had opportunity to ask questions and we could go back and forth, which I think is very good.
    • 06:07:52
      I think that, you know, going
    • 06:07:55
      Ford, I think that for the last, what I would suggest is that for the last speaking opportunity, if we're going to keep that, that we have it so that, you know, if you've already spoken, because that last one is not required.
    • 06:08:10
      It's not like a, you know, a public hearing on a topic or anything like that, that that's my understanding that, you know, if you've spoken once during any other times, you, you know, you're not, you know, you can't speak then.
    • 06:08:24
      and that we have that also limited because if we have a long meeting and that, you know, you know, that could be limited, you know, to, I don't know, we can say up there four or eight people or something like that and that we keep our current, I don't know if it's a policy or rule that meetings don't go past 11 and that what Sena said is that we see how we can put those items on the next meeting.
    • 06:08:54
      That's what I'm kind of seeing, what's emerging out of this conversation, our conversations, and let's see what works.
    • 06:09:04
      And if we see that it's not working as the way we thought, that we have the opportunity or the right to revisit this, either next year during a retreat or even beforehand.
    • 06:09:18
      That's kind of where I'm seeing.
    • 06:09:20
      I'm not sure where you
    • 06:09:21
      where you think we're going, Mr. Mayor, but I appreciate your insight.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:09:30
      Does the start time still work for everyone?
    • 06:09:32
      I know there have been some talk about whether to start the meetings any earlier.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:09:40
      I can plan.
    • 06:09:41
      If I know two months in advance, I can plan for pretty much anything.
    • 06:09:45
      So it doesn't matter to me.
    • 06:09:47
      Michael or Juan or Sena?
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:09:52
      They start now at 6.30, right?
    • 06:09:55
      6.30.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:09:55
      Yeah, I would prefer to do 5.30 if possible.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:10:00
      Okay, so 5.30, we're almost always in closed session.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:10:04
      Well, that's up for discussion, too.
    • 06:10:08
      Right now, the way we have it is that the first Monday of the month, the meeting starts with closed, well, in open session, but going into closed session at 5.30.
    • 06:10:18
      And then the third Monday of the month,
    • 06:10:20
      you have your reports at four o'clock.
    • 06:10:24
      So all of that is up for discussion on how you want to handle your meetings, whether that's working for you or whether you want to make any adjustments to that.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:10:32
      It might make it easier for folks who have to be at work at eight o'clock in the morning if we started earlier in the afternoon the day before.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:10:43
      I mean, I can start at four o'clock
    • 06:10:49
      But if we want to move the reports for all meetings to four o'clock.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:10:57
      Well, I thought that's what they were now, right?
    • 06:10:59
      We already have one meeting of the month that starts at four, essentially.
    • 06:11:04
      The second.
    • 06:11:05
      Then the first meeting of the month, I guess, nominally starts at 630, but we often have closed session discussions beforehand.
    • 06:11:14
      I mean, if we were to just nominally started at 530, and then I guess if we had closed session, we'd have to start at 330 or 4, I don't know, but I think moving it up certainly is better for me.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 06:11:28
      I'm sorry.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:11:31
      Do you want to move your consent agenda to a 4 o'clock session?
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:11:42
      I thought it was a closed meeting that Sena was referring to.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:11:47
      So what we've been trying to do is just advertise a starting time.
    • 06:11:52
      So right now it's four o'clock on your second meeting of the month and it's 530 on your first meeting of the month.
    • 06:12:01
      And the different components of your meeting take place throughout, you know, over an eight hour period of time starting when you start.
    • 06:12:13
      So the question is, do you want to start earlier and do you want to rearrange the segments of your agenda?
    • 06:12:18
      So do you want to start with, you know, do you want to start with consent agendas, you know, as opposed to waiting to do that later in the meeting?
    • 06:12:30
      One meeting you start with reports, but that doesn't mean you won't have reports on a regular agenda on a different meeting.
    • 06:12:37
      So it's
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 06:12:38
      Well, I see what you're saying, Lisa.
    • 06:12:41
      For what I'm hearing and seeing is that we may have some public going to speak on the consent agenda item, and maybe four o'clock is too early for people that might be at work and things.
    • 06:12:51
      Is that right?
    • 06:12:53
      Right.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:12:54
      So just right now, your start time is what it is, and you're just trying to figure out how to organize your agenda to fit all of your business in that window.
    • 06:13:04
      So the first Monday, that's
    • 06:13:07
      is 5.30 plus eight hours, which is your Zoom limitation.
    • 06:13:11
      And then the second meeting, it's four o'clock plus eight hours.
    • 06:13:15
      So you have leeway within that block of time to get all of your business done, whether it's reports, public hearings, consent agenda, matters from the public, whatever it is.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:13:31
      I mean, what if we moved
    • 06:13:34
      all meetings to start at four and we start with reports menus.
    • 06:13:37
      The idea was that by putting reports early, one, we could have staff who would normally or other people who come to give us reports from being stuck here to the end of the meeting.
    • 06:13:48
      Two, it was also because the public could go back and look at these without having to have their voices heard about
    • 06:14:01
      an upcoming vote that might take place on that idea.
    • 06:14:04
      So that way they could look at it at their leisure and not be left out.
    • 06:14:09
      And so it wouldn't be something that was voted upon during that time.
    • 06:14:15
      So if we started at four o'clock and had reports and then closed session, opened the meeting up, I don't know, even at six, but we usually need to have at least an hour to an hour and a half for closed session.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:14:39
      So by reports, are you referring to anything that would not, it might require council discussion, but it would not require council action?
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:14:49
      I think so.
    • 06:14:49
      Something that wouldn't necessarily have repercussions that if the public looked at it the next day, they would no longer, they would be, so my concern about anything that would be at a time that's difficult for the majority of the public to get to
    • 06:15:07
      would be that it was something that we were making a decision upon that someone would feel that they didn't have a chance to speak to during public comment.
    • 06:15:15
      Things that we discussed or have reports on, then the public could always go back and look at that later, as long as it wasn't under a press timeline that night.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 06:15:35
      So would that include, for example, first readings of ordinances?
    • 06:15:45
      Do first readings of ordinances normally have public comment on them?
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:15:50
      Well, public comment's different than public hearing.
    • SPEAKER_04
    • 06:15:53
      Public hearing, I mean.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:15:54
      There are quite a few ordinances that don't require public hearings.
    • 06:15:59
      Or you do the public hearing
    • 06:16:04
      at the Planning Commission on Zoning Matters, and then you have the first reading of a zoning ordinance at the council level, but you don't have additional public hearing.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:16:18
      But we may well have public comment on that topic.
    • 06:16:23
      In fact, the last meeting, I think probably half of the commenters were on people who were there to comment on what amounted to a second reading of a zoning ordinance.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:16:33
      Right.
    • 06:16:33
      I'm just trying to parse out when you say reports, I'm just trying to figure out what it means because it's not necessarily usual for you to have a lot.
    • 06:16:42
      Reports on your agenda aren't typically taking a lot of your time.
    • 06:16:47
      You have them occasionally, but that's not the bulk of your agendas.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:16:52
      Well, that could be for, we could have that space for annual reports from boards and commissions.
    • 06:16:59
      I know that some of the departments like NDS have planned to
    • 06:17:02
      present at the four o'clock.
    • 06:17:05
      So those could be the types of reports.
    • 06:17:07
      I would think they're actual presentations and not something that will come up necessarily as a reading.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:17:19
      So you're just talking about starting at four o'clock all the time and always starting with reports.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:17:30
      Yeah, because like last meeting we had the Rivanna, we had the waste report and we had another, we also had another report on something else at the end of the meeting.
    • SPEAKER_11
    • 06:17:46
      That was James presenting on the zoning rewrite.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:17:49
      Right, so if those could have been at four o'clock.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:17:54
      So we actually could,
    • 06:17:56
      Reef, I guess reframe it and not have it as reports, but as general business.
    • 06:18:02
      So those are items that are general in nature.
    • 06:18:05
      If it's a report or if it's just something general, then have that at the four o'clock for guests who might be coming in to present or or other staff.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:18:21
      I mean, I think that that meets that the
    • 06:18:27
      The idea behind that decision of, you know, again, we want to make sure the public has a chance to see our decision making and to see why and still has a chance to comment on stuff, which they would as long as it's not something that's being voted on.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 06:18:57
      How do other people feel about that?
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 06:19:06
      So what we're saying is that both meetings were started for instead of calling them reports.
    • 06:19:18
      What would you say, Sena?
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:19:23
      getting clarification on whether that would be considered the general business portion of the meeting rather than a separate reports section, would reports just be included in general business?
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 06:19:39
      So I am fine with starting both meetings at four and one of those meetings we can get reports
    • 06:19:47
      or, you know, what we decided to call it in other meeting, we could, or we may even have to start earlier, to start the meeting at 530, but we would meet at 4, one of those we would go, we could have our closed session, you know, if we feel like we needed to meet earlier, do it from, let's say, 4 to 430, I mean, I'm sorry, 4
    • 06:20:13
      to five and maybe 30 minutes to grab something to get together, things together for 530 and start at 530.
    • 06:20:23
      Is that what I'm hearing for that meeting and the other meeting?
    • 06:20:27
      The same thing, we get the report for an hour, hour and a half, and then we will start the meeting?
    • 06:20:33
      I think that that works.
    • 06:20:36
      And we'll also do the other things that we talk about as far as watching our comments and
    • 06:20:43
      and at the last portion, you know, we still keep that, as I understand, but, you know, I put out there that if you spoke once, you can't speak at that time and maybe putting a limit on that as far as the number of speakers, but, you know, I'd like to hear from some, you know, Michael on this, you know, he seems to have some insight on the
    • 06:21:13
      flow of the community on this?
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 06:21:20
      I don't know.
    • 06:21:20
      I mean, to me, I haven't thought about it too much, but I don't think it would really be limiting to community engagement.
    • 06:21:31
      I'd be able
    • 06:21:34
      In terms of time, I would be able to make that work because I know that's just an adjustment in terms of our schedules as well.
    • 06:21:41
      But I would be able to make it work.
    • 06:21:43
      And I guess to your point earlier, we can sort of evaluate, is it actually helping?
    • 06:21:48
      Is it hurting?
    • 06:21:49
      Is it making no difference?
    • 06:21:50
      And sort of adjust once we see.
    • 06:21:52
      But I'm able and willing to try that adjustment.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 06:21:59
      That's what I like is that
    • 06:22:01
      We make these changes.
    • 06:22:02
      If everyone is agreeing that we start both meetings at four, and we'll have to see if that's OK with staff as well.
    • 06:22:11
      One meeting is where we have a closed session.
    • 06:22:14
      Out of the meeting, we will get those reports like we essentially do now.
    • 06:22:20
      And we take the other steps still with the intent of ending the meeting at 11.
    • 06:22:29
      and moving things over, you know, if we need to.
    • 06:22:32
      And then, you know, let's see how this flows.
    • 06:22:38
      I think that's not too many of a drastic type of changes.
    • 06:22:42
      We still have opportunity for robust public input, you know, way more than any other locality, certainly in the area.
    • 06:22:50
      But we're also thinking about, you know, the future, not only about the future, but
    • 06:22:57
      of other people being able to run.
    • 06:23:00
      I certainly have heard from a lot of staff just walking on the mall or just seeing them in different environments that these meetings are really hard on them.
    • 06:23:09
      And they understand, they do it because they're professionals, but this is one of those things that, you know, the retention that we hear about that's really, really hard.
    • 06:23:20
      I mean, one of those things that plays into it, so.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:23:26
      My question is, Ms.
    • 06:23:29
      Robertson, if we're moving this around, it sounds like we're eliminating the designated spot for closed meetings and you're the one probably more than anybody else who's going to want us to have closed meetings.
    • 06:23:41
      Does that all sound workable to you or do you have concerns?
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:23:46
      So my presence is required for the full length of the meeting.
    • 06:23:49
      So I don't mind whether you have a closed meeting at the beginning or the end.
    • 06:23:54
      but I would like some clarification on what happens both as to a closed meeting as well as to matters from the public on the back end if you are getting to 11 o'clock and you're nowhere near finished your meeting.
    • 06:24:12
      So, or the, you know, the eight hour Zoom timeline is being reached and there's not enough time.
    • 06:24:20
      Is there...
    • 06:24:22
      Sometimes your closed meeting matters are things that can be continued to a different date, but often the things that I need to talk to you about are time sensitive.
    • 06:24:33
      And so my only concern about having the closed meeting at the end, particularly while you continue to use an electronic meeting format, is how that's going to work with an 11 o'clock cutoff.
    • 06:24:47
      So
    • 06:24:49
      I just would like some clarification on the 11 o'clock cutoff also as to the second matters from the public.
    • 06:24:57
      So if you're getting to 11 o'clock, you haven't finished your regular business yet.
    • 06:25:02
      We know that regular business can be continued to the next meeting or you can even continue it to a special meeting if you want to set one up.
    • 06:25:10
      But what are you going to do with the second matters of the public?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:25:14
      Well, my own thought on it is that
    • 06:25:17
      Second matters from the public.
    • 06:25:19
      If we have said you get to speak either at the beginning or at the end, but not both, we're probably not going to have more than a couple of people speaking at the end because most of the people who have spoken at the end have been people who spoke earlier, at least in recent memory.
    • 06:25:36
      So I don't think that I would not have any issue of wanting to cut that
    • 06:25:44
      cut that short necessarily.
    • 06:25:46
      I just don't think that's an issue.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:25:48
      So you as the presiding officer might say, we're going to cut the final two matters from the agenda because we won't be able to finish them by 11, but we're going to go straight to the second matters from the public and then conclude the meeting?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:26:08
      Well, first of all, I don't think 11 o'clock would be a hard stop.
    • 06:26:14
      I mean, if we're in the middle of something and we're, maybe we just, maybe we say we don't take up new things after 11 o'clock or we, you know, that we were determined that we're going to try to get ourselves done by 11 o'clock and we don't start something new thereafter.
    • 06:26:31
      Yeah, we can use that.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:26:33
      That's what I'm saying.
    • 06:26:34
      If you have three things left on your agenda, you would conclude two, let's say you have two things left on your agenda and it's 10 minutes to 11.
    • 06:26:44
      You would say, we're not going to start the last two things on your agenda, but you would go straight to matters from the public the second time around, and then you would conclude your meeting.
    • 06:26:56
      Is that what your thought is?
    • 06:26:58
      Because otherwise, the 11 o'clock is just a guideline.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:27:02
      Well, and it is a guideline, but I'd like it to be a firmer guideline than it is right now, which is it's being ignored right now.
    • 06:27:14
      and we may not do everything all, you know, all at once and we may make some changes along the way, but I do think we ought to, we need to be firmer about it than we are.
    • 06:27:30
      We need to do some things that will make it less likely that it's even an issue.
    • 06:27:37
      And if we get to a, you know, 1050 and we've got two items on the agenda plus
    • 06:27:43
      the possibility of final comment.
    • 06:27:46
      My inclination would be to say, let's finish.
    • 06:27:49
      I mean, as I think Deputy Marshall pointed out in a comment here, that the First Amendment piece is not absolute.
    • 06:28:02
      And what it really gets to is whether we're discriminating among speakers.
    • 06:28:08
      And for us to say we're going to have
    • 06:28:12
      only a certain number of minutes of comment or a number of comments at the beginning of the meeting.
    • 06:28:18
      And if it somehow turns out that we don't get to the final comment period at the end, it's not a First Amendment issue.
    • 06:28:25
      That's not to say it's not insignificant to the person who wants to speak, but sometimes realities have to intervene.
    • 06:28:38
      So my inclination would be just to say,
    • 06:28:40
      We won't start anything new after 11 o'clock.
    • 06:28:44
      And if that means that there's some speaker who doesn't get to speak, invite them to send us a letter or an email or call or something or show up at the beginning of the next meeting.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:28:56
      That's just something you're going to manage as the presiding officer.
    • 06:29:01
      You're not asking us to write into your rules anything new.
    • 06:29:06
      You have the ability to manage the meeting that way.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:29:10
      Well, I guess the first question is, how does that sound to other counselors?
    • 06:29:15
      We don't start anything new after 11 o'clock.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 06:29:21
      I think particularly if we're starting these meetings at 4 o'clock, I don't think that's unreasonable.
    • 06:29:28
      That's seven hours right there.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:29:33
      Mayor, is it possible to poll the group at the time and say,
    • 06:29:38
      you know it's 1045 we've got two more items that we think could probably be done in half an hour and then we're done with the business is the will of the group to continue or not so that the sort of default would be we have to prove as a group we're willing to proceed well in theory right now we're supposed to have a vote to go beyond 11 o'clock if we want to do that
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:30:03
      I'm okay with that.
    • 06:30:04
      It's just different.
    • 06:30:06
      We just haven't been doing it lately.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:30:08
      I think we just do that.
    • 06:30:09
      I think if you've already got the procedure that basically you have to vote to extend the meeting past 11, then that seems like a reasonable thing to me.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:30:23
      Do we actually have a requirement in here, Lisa, that says our goal is to end by 11?
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:30:31
      I think it's
    • 06:30:32
      I don't think it's phrased as a hard stop.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:30:37
      So why have we had votes to continue past 11 from time to time?
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:30:43
      Kina, help me.
    • 06:30:44
      I'm having trouble locating it in the procedures.
    • 06:30:49
      Let's see.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:30:52
      I don't know exactly in the procedures, but my question is, if it is in here written that it has to be a vote, can that be changed so that it is
    • 06:31:02
      a simple poll and not something that has to be so firm.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:31:08
      Yeah, but I'm having trouble finding it in the procedures.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:31:18
      Well, the goal that we would end by 11 is in paragraph E, 2.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:31:26
      Oh, yeah, there it is.
    • 06:31:28
      There it is.
    • 06:31:28
      So it does not reference a vote.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:31:35
      So whether we have a formal vote or whether at 1045 or so, we just, I stopped the action long enough to ask other counselors how we're feeling about going past 11.
    • 06:31:46
      Yeah.
    • 06:31:47
      Is that workable?
    • 06:31:50
      And Ms.
    • 06:31:50
      Thomas, I'll just ask you to remind me.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:31:53
      I'll do my best.
    • 06:31:55
      And it may depend on what the items are at the end of the meeting too.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 06:31:59
      Yeah.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:32:01
      Yeah, because I think what you can do if you'd like
    • 06:32:04
      Because we are trying to move to a single meeting format, at any time someone can make a motion to change the order of something on the agenda.
    • 06:32:15
      So for example, if you have, if an agenda for a particular meeting has a closed meeting at 530, but you want to go long in your reports, you can make a motion to move the closed meeting to the end of the agenda.
    • 06:32:29
      And then if it's really important, something that you need legal advice on, I can just prompt you around nine o'clock and say, don't forget, we need about an hour for the closed meeting.
    • 06:32:42
      So you have some flexibility, particularly on the closed meetings to move around when that happens.
    • 06:32:50
      It does not have to be other than as an agenda item.
    • 06:32:55
      Generally, it doesn't have to be in one place or another.
    • 06:32:59
      if you're not advertising it as a separate meeting.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 06:33:03
      Okay.
    • 06:33:04
      So I just have a quick question.
    • 06:33:05
      I'm sorry to confuse this, but I thought that we only had closed meetings like at the beginning, but we do have the ability to have it like after our regular meetings that that does take place from time to time?
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:33:23
      Well, it would all be part of your regular meeting.
    • 06:33:26
      Just on the agenda that you approved for your regular meeting, you could say, instead of having the closed session at 530, let's move it today to the end of the meeting.
    • 06:33:38
      Sort of like what you do if somebody wants to pull something off the consent agenda, instead of having it on the consent agenda, it goes to the end of the regular meeting.
    • 06:33:47
      So it's all one meeting agenda.
    • 06:33:50
      It's not a separate meeting, but you absolutely can decide
    • 06:33:54
      you know on a given day do you do you want to do you want to have your closed meeting up front or because of everything else on your agenda would you rather hear it at the end?
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 06:34:04
      Yeah.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:34:08
      So did anybody else have any response to either the notion of limiting the number of speakers at the beginning or in limiting the term the amount of speech from three minutes to two minutes?
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:34:23
      or do you want to see how these other changes go and then... Yeah, I'm not in favor of limiting it to two minutes.
    • 06:34:31
      I'm not in favor of limiting the 16.
    • 06:34:33
      Okay.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:34:35
      The rules currently say that we can limit it to two minutes if we want to on a meeting by meeting basis.
    • 06:34:44
      I don't remember where exactly.
    • 06:34:45
      It says, prior to opening public hearing, council may by motion limit the number of speakers who will be heard.
    • 06:34:51
      and or reduce the time for each speaker to two minutes upon determining that the session could not be commenced in a timely manner.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 06:35:01
      I would think the most relevant time for that may be, and I've seen the Planning Commission do this, when we have a public hearing, which has no speaker limit, that we know is going to have dozens of people.
    • 06:35:14
      I would think that is the most relevant.
    • 06:35:15
      And I've seen the Planning Commission do it.
    • 06:35:17
      And I think that could be reasonable.
    • 06:35:19
      You know, if we've had a public hearing that the Planning Commission just had 30, 40 people speak at, you know, we anticipate that will happen as well.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:35:31
      We did do that recently.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:35:32
      I'm sorry, Ms.
    • 06:35:35
      Thomas?
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:35:35
      We did do that recently.
    • 06:35:38
      Lisa, you might remember the topic, but we had about 75 speakers at one of our meetings, and they were limited to two minutes.
    • 06:35:45
      But that's a public hearing, so it's not generally public comment.
    • 06:35:49
      It's for a public hearing.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:35:51
      That provision is specific to public hearings.
    • 06:35:54
      Now, you certainly could write into your procedures
    • 06:36:00
      a reservation of rights to change matters from the public to two minutes.
    • 06:36:08
      But I think as a general rule, given the broad nature of your matters from the public, it would be better just to pick a time and just apply it consistently, whether it's two minutes or three minutes.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:36:22
      My thought is, let's see how the changes we've just talked about play out.
    • 06:36:28
      and see if we, again, my goal would be to get to the point where we're at the meeting part as early as possible.
    • 06:36:37
      And if we're going to start at 6.30, that would be, say, by 7.30.
    • 06:36:40
      If we're going to start the meeting at 5.30, then by 6.30.
    • 06:36:45
      But that it be at a time when people can know that if they get there right at 6.30, we didn't start without them.
    • 06:36:53
      or that it makes it likely that we will get to their issue before, you know, 1030 or something.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:37:03
      So could we, what could we also do like the moment of silence, the announcements and the proclamations, any board updates that we want to give also at that four o'clock in the very beginning?
    • 06:37:22
      Caroline Miller, Standardized, moving that to the four o'clock.
    • 06:37:24
      So we kind of move the whole, we move all of that.
    • 06:37:30
      We generally, because I want to be careful about moving the meat of the meeting any earlier than six or 630, including beginnings of public comment and the consent agenda.
    • 06:37:41
      Just I've, much earlier than six on that is just a little bit, I think, pushing some boundaries
    • 06:37:52
      of it becoming feeling to our constituents like we might be trying to not hear from them.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:38:06
      Why is that?
    • 06:38:06
      I don't understand that.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:38:10
      because the making sure that people have a chance to get to the meeting for public comment time for times that could be a single vote on the consent agenda.
    • 06:38:23
      A lot of the items on the consent agenda are one only vote.
    • 06:38:28
      And if it, you know, the public note is notified Wednesday evening of what's on the agenda.
    • 06:38:34
      And then there's only a couple of days.
    • 06:38:36
      So
    • 06:38:38
      for them to make sure that they have that chance.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:38:43
      It gets in the way of dinner time or childcare.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:38:46
      Yeah, that's what I'm kind of worrying about.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 06:38:50
      Yeah, and it was a bigger issue when we were in person, but there's definitely a challenge in terms of
    • 06:38:56
      getting off work, getting home and all that.
    • 06:39:00
      I just want to flag for our own timekeeping right now.
    • 06:39:03
      I do have a hard deadline where I have to be somewhere at 430, so I can't go too much longer past four.
    • 06:39:10
      And I know we still had proclamations and what was it?
    • 06:39:15
      Votes listed on the agenda.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:39:17
      Votes and decision making.
    • 06:39:20
      are the votes, decision-making proclamations are the things that are left on our agenda.
    • 06:39:25
      So I think we have general consensus around starting earlier around enforcing
    • 06:39:38
      the notion that we would not be responding for more than a couple of minutes that's already in the rules about saying no.
    • 06:39:49
      If you spoke at the first public comment period, you do not get to speak at the second public comment period.
    • 06:39:55
      Do we have agreement on that?
    • 06:39:56
      Okay.
    • 06:40:01
      Okay.
    • 06:40:04
      and that any other changes we will defer until we see how this all works.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:40:12
      We would also make some changes.
    • 06:40:14
      We need to update your procedures to reflect that you are going to do the consent agenda in advance of the first matters from the public as you have been doing.
    • 06:40:27
      Okay.
    • 06:40:29
      I'm going to update that and then
    • 06:40:32
      build in the flexibility since we're now having a single meeting format for all of your preliminary things that you do, moment of silence, roll call, proclamations, that you have the ability, I'll adjust the procedures where you specify the order of business at each regular meeting to reflect
    • 06:41:00
      the four o'clock start and we'll go from there.
    • 06:41:04
      So I'll make those changes and send them out to you all to review.
    • 06:41:09
      Great.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:41:10
      And the moment of silence replaces the pledge that's been the practice for the last over a year or so.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:41:17
      And I would also request that we start the time clock while we are also speaking.
    • 06:41:25
      So that kind of gives us
    • 06:41:27
      I mean, it's in our procedures when it comes to debating, et cetera, that counselors are only supposed to have three minutes.
    • 06:41:34
      So I think we should also be modeling that just as we are asking our constituents that we do the same and that we have that clock running to keep us the ability to watch ourselves.
    • 06:41:47
      Along with five minutes.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:41:53
      That's usually for a presentation, I think.
    • 06:41:55
      Along with that,
    • 06:41:57
      With the speaking for counsel, I would suggest that whomever makes the motion and the second be given the first opportunity to speak so that we have some order as to how the discussion will flow.
    • 06:42:08
      And that way it's probably easier for the timekeeper to know when someone's going to speak and then just do a the presiding officer can call on counselors after that.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:42:22
      Okay.
    • 06:42:26
      So we would do the person making the motion would speak first, the person seconding would speak second, then I would call on the other two, say an alphabetical order or something.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:42:41
      I think so.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:42:44
      And then typically I would speak last on the matter.
    • 06:42:46
      All right.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:42:49
      We feel like though that we need to actually put the time clock up and that's going to add time to do that, right?
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:42:55
      Can't we just rely on the mayor to- In your current procedures, it says that in making a motion, a member shall endeavor to state the motion within five minutes.
    • 06:43:06
      Now that seems kind of silly, but there have been some lengthy motions made.
    • 06:43:12
      And then it says in debating a motion or in proposing amendments or substitute motions, a member shall try to state the basis of the procedural motion within three minutes.
    • 06:43:26
      And in asking questions of a speaker, council members should take not more than three minutes to phrase the question.
    • 06:43:33
      Maybe we should clarify whether individual discussion or comments in support or against a motion, we should tighten that up.
    • 06:43:47
      But if you're going to specify time periods in your procedures, the presiding officer is going to have to hold you to them.
    • 06:43:56
      If you don't want time limits, we should take them out.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:43:59
      I think we need to keep that as flexible as possible.
    • 06:44:01
      I mean, trying to throw up a time limit and all of that, I don't agree with that.
    • 06:44:07
      I think that the mayor should, I think having a little bit of wiggle room, the language that you already have, and having the mayor exercise his good judgment is the most efficient way versus us
    • 06:44:18
      starting a time clock for every time we open our mouth.
    • 06:44:22
      I don't think that's prudent.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:44:24
      The current timekeepers would appreciate that.
    • 06:44:28
      That's right now the communication staff.
    • 06:44:30
      Once we are in person, the clerk, along with taking minutes and doing other things, is the timekeeper.
    • 06:44:37
      So that could get tricky for staff.
    • 06:44:40
      But it's up to you all also to keep an eye on those types of things.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:44:46
      My thought on it is that let's see how we go with what we've already suggested.
    • 06:44:51
      And if it seems like it's not good enough, then we can take additional steps.
    • 06:44:59
      My guess is we'll be okay as is.
    • 06:45:02
      because, frankly, as I've looked back at some of the meetings that have run longer, there are really two major difficulties.
    • 06:45:12
      One was we were packing too much onto the agenda.
    • 06:45:17
      And two, to be perfectly blunt, was we were getting an awful lot of comment from the mayor and continuing argument and back and forth.
    • 06:45:25
      And if we don't duplicate some of that, we can get things done a lot faster.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:45:33
      Mr. Mayor, I think both of us have to be in another meeting at four.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:45:37
      Yeah.
    • 06:45:38
      Okay.
    • 06:45:39
      So let's, it sounds like we've reached a point of being done on that one.
    • 06:45:46
      Votes and decision making.
    • 06:45:48
      What did you all have in mind that we needed to talk about there?
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 06:45:50
      I don't recall.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:46:04
      I'll tell you what, let's move on to proclamations, and if you remember, we'll come back to it.
    • 06:46:08
      What do you want to talk about in terms of proclamations?
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:46:12
      I added that one being that we've received a few requests for proclamations recently, and usually it's at the mayor's discretion whether to sign proclamations, whether to present proclamations for various things, and we get a wide variety of requests from
    • 06:46:31
      wanting to recognize people wanting to recognize certain milestones or designating a certain month as a group's month.
    • 06:46:42
      So I just received another one.
    • 06:46:46
      But just wanting to know how what parameters you'd like to put around those types of requests.
    • 06:46:52
      If there's anything you've seen in the past where we're honoring things that are on a national basis that are already
    • 06:46:59
      being recognized nationally, but we're being requested locally to recognize as a proclamation.
    • 06:47:06
      Is that something you want to do?
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:47:07
      I hadn't thought about it.
    • 06:47:15
      I mean, it'll be no surprise that we've worked out a resolution that will commemorate Black History Month coming in February.
    • 06:47:25
      I signed that today, by the way.
    • 06:47:29
      another resolution.
    • 06:47:31
      I don't want to give anything away here, but a longtime employee is going to be recognized.
    • 06:47:40
      It'll be well known when it happens.
    • 06:47:41
      It's not a great secret, but I don't want to steal somebody's thunder.
    • 06:47:46
      Beyond that, I saw the request that came in just in the last couple of days that I'd want to think a little bit about because I'm not quite sure what precedent that's
    • 06:47:58
      That setting, and maybe we could talk about that offline a little bit, but there's not been a situation where over the last couple of years I said, why in heaven's name are we doing a proclamation like that?
    • 06:48:15
      I don't have a sense that it's been abused or misapplied.
    • 06:48:19
      Yeah.
    • 06:48:21
      If it has been sort of up to the mayor, I guess I would say if somebody wants me to do a proclamation that I think is iffy, I would check with the other counselors to see if anybody has any thoughts.
    • SPEAKER_08
    • 06:48:40
      Yeah, this could potentially take a little bit longer than we have time left for because what I'm thinking is I know we've gotten in some requests for proclamations before that
    • 06:48:51
      our former mayor did not feel comfortable signing on to.
    • 06:48:54
      What do we do in that case?
    • 06:48:56
      Do we?
    • 06:48:56
      I mean, and we should have policy about that.
    • 06:49:04
      Because I hate the idea of if the majority of council wants to put a proclamation forward, but the mayor feels very personally uncomfortable signing off on that, I won't don't want to ask them to do that.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 06:49:21
      So we could just be reasonable.
    • 06:49:24
      And I don't I don't think we've ever had at least in the past two years ever had an issue with proclamations, but just sort of the goal is
    • 06:49:33
      Is there, you know, is there consensus of counsel?
    • 06:49:36
      Is there anyone who has a serious objection to it?
    • 06:49:38
      And if so, talk with each other and work it out.
    • 06:49:43
      I mean, my default would be if anyone has a strong objection to not move forward with it, but I just haven't seen it be an issue.
    • 06:49:50
      Likewise, just haven't thought through at all any precedents that would be created for anything.
    • 06:49:54
      I agree.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:49:57
      I've not been in the habit of forwarding all of those proclamations to counsel.
    • 06:50:02
      Most of the time I've just sent it to the mayor and we've never really had a discussion about whether that was the way you want to handle it or not.
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 06:50:13
      Quite frankly, I am comfortable with that.
    • Juandiego Wade
    • 06:50:15
      Yeah.
    • 06:50:19
      Yeah, I think this is one of those things that, you know, kind of organizations and maybe individuals may kind of expect from kind of the local government to make it and these type of designations and
    • 06:50:32
      and I think that we just can use our judgment if it's something that it's not right, then the mayor or whoever that designee is just can flag it, maybe send that one out to everyone, but I just don't want to create policies and guidelines where we can use our common sense.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:50:59
      Well, if you're willing to rely on the common sense of the mayor.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:51:06
      Don't let us down, mayor.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:51:07
      Is there anything else you all have figured out that whatever was going to be the issue with votes and decision making?
    • SPEAKER_02
    • 06:51:18
      The only two things I can think of, and I guess it wouldn't be any formal policy, but just how do we
    • 06:51:25
      Do we need to do more like if we've been discussing something for a while to just more regularly be like, okay, we got to just get to vote.
    • 06:51:34
      And second,
    • 06:51:40
      It's not that big an issue, but more than proclamations, I feel like the issue of what letters to sign on to is a trickier conversation, but that is not that important and doesn't take up our time at council meetings, so we don't necessarily need to dwell on that, but those are the only things that come to mind for me.
    • SPEAKER_05
    • 06:51:57
      One thing related to voting is just coming prepared to the meetings by reading the materials that will help you to get to your decisions quicker, so
    • 06:52:09
      I'll reiterate it every time I see you probably, but just come prepared and that helps with the discussion.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:52:16
      Are there things that we don't have to have a roll call on?
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:52:25
      Yes, there are.
    • 06:52:26
      And I think our pattern of doing the roll call is primarily so we don't have to worry about which requires a roll call and which don't.
    • 06:52:36
      There are a lot of zoning cases in which the Supreme Court has said each individual's vote has to be recorded.
    • 06:52:43
      And so since you always have had a lot of zoning matters, you know, that's important.
    • 06:52:49
      So there actually are some categories of things that require the roll call vote.
    • 06:52:55
      So it's just easier to do it.
    • 06:52:57
      But if you'd like, I can start working with the clerk to indicate by agenda item whether or not you need a roll call.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:53:06
      I'm not deeply concerned about it.
    • 06:53:10
      It's about 45 seconds per vote or something.
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:53:12
      Yeah, that's why it's always been easier just to do it that way.
    • 06:53:16
      And then the Council Payne's comments just reminded me of something as well.
    • 06:53:23
      But just keep in mind, everything is so fast paced here that we often
    • 06:53:30
      see a lot of emails in which you're supposedly taking a poll, but it seems more like a vote.
    • 06:53:38
      So it is fine to poll each other individually to find out, you know, sort of what your position is on a matter, but it's not really okay to authorize something to be done by email.
    • 06:53:51
      So just keep in mind that anything
    • 06:53:55
      Any council business has to be transacted by a vote of a majority of you and your votes have to be taken in your meetings.
    • 06:54:04
      So everything today happens electronically and happens by email, it seems, but the General Assembly still hasn't allowed you to to transact business by email outside your electronic meetings.
    • 06:54:24
      So maybe that's maybe that's why this made its way to the to the retreat agenda.
    • Brian Pinkston
    • 06:54:30
      But could I ask one one other thing?
    • 06:54:34
      So when we were going through the onboarding training, I'm looking at my notebook over here a couple of weeks.
    • 06:54:41
      One of us before Christmas, I guess.
    • 06:54:44
      Vice Mayor Wade myself.
    • 06:54:46
      the procedures that were in that manual seem to differ from what was on the website in terms of the meeting flow and all of the things that we were talking today.
    • 06:54:56
      Can we just double check that all of that lines up and is the same?
    • SPEAKER_03
    • 06:55:02
      We will.
    • 06:55:02
      I know I obtained from Ms.
    • 06:55:06
      Thomas the copy of the meeting procedures that I annotated for you during the training, but we do need to
    • 06:55:14
      Maybe once you update them with some of the adjustments you talked about today, we'll just ask for them to be reposted on the website so we know they're the current procedures.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:55:26
      Okay.
    • 06:55:29
      Well, I think we're done.
    • 06:55:31
      Brian and I have got to hustle off to the MPO, so we'll be adjourned.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 06:55:40
      Thanks, everyone.
    • 06:55:41
      Thank you all.
    • Lloyd Snook
    • 06:55:42
      Good day.
    • SPEAKER_06
    • 06:55:45
      Have a good day.
    • 06:55:45
      Bye.